Manual NX 8.5

Essentials for NX Designers
Student Guide
November 2012
MT10051–S — NX 8.5
Publication Number
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Proprietary and restricted rights notice
This software and related documentation are proprietary to Siemens Product
Lifecycle Management Software Inc.
© 2012 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Siemens and the Siemens logo are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
NX is a trademark or registered trademark of Siemens Product Lifecycle
Management Software Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and in
other countries. All other trademarks, registered trademarks or service
marks belong to their respective holders
2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Contents
Proprietary and restricted rights notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Course overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Course objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lesson format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learning tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NX 8.5 Help Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Template parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Teamcenter Integration for NX vs. native NX terminology . . . . . . . . . . .
Layer standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Implementing a layer standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
17
18
18
18
19
20
21
21
NX part files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Introduction to NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Gateway application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
The NX Window (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
New file overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Benefits of using templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Create a new file using a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Show and Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Activities: NX part files — Create new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Open file overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Loading an assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Part Versions group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Assembly Navigator overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Assembly Navigator user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Assembly Navigator hierarchy tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Displayed part and work part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Changing the displayed part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Design in context of an assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Make Displayed Part and Set Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Make Work Part and Set Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Close selected parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Exit an NX session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Activities: NX part files — Open, save, and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Essentials for NX Designers
3
Contents
Summary: NX part files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
The NX user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Customize and display toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Display toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Display toolbars using the shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Add or remove toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Access options on undocked toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Command Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Search for a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Title bar options in dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Less and More dialog box layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Dialog box actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Visual cues in dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Snap a dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Example roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Choose a role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Save toolbar configuration between sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Activities: User interface — Toolbars and Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Using the mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Shortcut toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
View shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Radial toolbars and radial shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Customizing radial toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Modify radial toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Graphics window view manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Deselect objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Preview selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Selection bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Selection bar Snap Point options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Activities: User Interface — Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Summary: User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Absolute coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
WCS options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
WCS Dynamics overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Position the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Reorient the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Contents
Activities: Coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Summary: Coordinate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Sketch overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Establishing design intent and a modeling strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Ways to use sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Sketches and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
General process for using sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Direct Sketch and the Sketch task environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Direct sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sketch Task Environment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Create Sketch overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sketch On Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Create a sketch on a plane or planar face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Sketch reference direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Intermediate Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Name sketches in the Modeling application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Name sketches in Sketch Task Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Finish Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Exit Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Direct sketch and feature edit preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Activities: Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Sketch curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Sketch help lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Short List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Continuous Auto Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
The Snap Angle option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Profile dialog bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Create Profile sketch curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Create lines parallel or perpendicular to other lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Create lines tangent to curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Create lines at angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Sketch Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Activities: Sketching curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Sketch curve functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Sketching constraints and Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Use Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Sketcher constraints and Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Use Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Essentials for NX Designers
5
Contents
Make Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Activities: Chamfer, Fillet, Quick Trim, Quick Extend, Make
Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Types of constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Degree-of-freedom arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Overconstrained sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Geometric Constraints dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Geometric Constraints shortcut toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Create geometric constraints using the shortcut toolbar . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Geometric Constraints quick reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Display Sketch Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Show / Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Show / Remove Constraints dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Activities: Sketch Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Sketch dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Sketch dimension types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Inferred Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Create Inferred Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Edit sketch dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Dimensions dialog bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Dimensions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Activities: Create constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Projects: Simple Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Summary: Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Expressions overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Expression examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Expressions case sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Expressions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Creating expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Create a numerical expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Edit an expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Listing expressions associated with features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
List References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Insert Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Parameter entry options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Expression options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Activities: Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Summary: Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Datum features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Contents
Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Datum plane types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Datum plane options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Applications for datum planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Create a datum plane using offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Create a datum plane midway between planar faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Create a datum plane at an angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Create a datum plane through three points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Activities: Datum features — Support design intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Datum axis types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Datum axis options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Applications for datum axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Create a datum axis through two points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Create a datum axis at an intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Create a datum axis from a point and a direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Create a datum axis on an edge and normal to a face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Activities: Datum features — cylindrical faces and other datums . . . . . 6-30
Summary: Datum features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Swept features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Types of swept features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Selection Intent - Curve Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Curve Rule options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Changing selection intent rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Curve collection modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Internal and external sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Internal and external sketch status change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Extrude start and end distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Create a simple extruded feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Combine bodies using Boolean commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Extrude – Inferred Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Body type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Revolve start and end angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Specifying vectors using the OrientXpress tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Create a simple revolved feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Sweep along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Create a simple sweep along guide feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Activities: Swept features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Projects: Simple Sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Summary: Swept features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Part structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Essentials for NX Designers
7
Contents
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Main panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Dependencies panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Details panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Preview panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Timestamp order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Switch between timestamp order view and design view . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Part Navigator shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Feature Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Reorder Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Reorder an object in the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Feature Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Model information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Types of features you can browse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Referenced expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
List referenced expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Simple Measure commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Measure Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Find the minimum distance between two objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Measure Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Assign a material to a solid body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Delayed updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Activities: Part structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Summary: Part structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Using sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Edit sketches with drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drag to assist sketch constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Copy, move, and edit sketch objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Create Inferred Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Auto Constrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Auto Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Activity: Auto Dimensioning Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Alternate Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Use Alternate Solution on tangent constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Use Alternate Solution on a dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Activities: Experiment with alternate solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Edit Dimension Associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Attach a Dimension to different geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Reattach Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Reattach a sketch on plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Activities: Reattach sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Mirror Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Mirror sketch curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Make Symmetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Contents
Activities: Mirror and Make Symmetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Sketch evaluation and update techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Summary: Using sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Trim a solid body to a face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Activities: Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Projects: Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Summary: Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Swept feature options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Extrude start and end limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Extrude with offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Two sided offset examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Single-sided offset examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Extrude with draft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Positive and negative draft angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Draft and the extrude direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Draft offset example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
DesignLogic parameter entry options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Reference existing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Activities: Swept feature options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Project: Advanced sweeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Summary: Swept feature options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Hole features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Hole dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Hole positioning options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Hole direction options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Hole form and dimension options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Create a General Hole feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Activities: Hole features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Project: Hole features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Summary: Hole features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Create a shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Assign alternate thicknesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Shell options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Selection Intent face rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Activities: Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Summary: Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Essentials for NX Designers
9
Contents
Associative copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Pattern Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Pattern Feature methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Create a linear pattern of features in two directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Create a circular pattern of concentric features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Activities: Associative copies – pattern features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Extract Geometry – Mirror Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Create a mirrored body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Edit a mirrored body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Mirror Body options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Activities: Associative copies – mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Summary: Associative copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Edge operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Edge Blend dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Edge Blend preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Add New Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Activities: Edge operations — blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Create a Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Chamfer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Activities: Edge operations — chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Projects: Shell, Associative Copies, Blends and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Summary: Edge operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Introduction to Synchronous Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Synchronous Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Move Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Move Face options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Resize Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Activities: Introduction to Synchronous Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Summary: Introduction to Synchronous Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Introduction to NX Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Component objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Component Part Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Load states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Scope group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Saved Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Contents
Activities: Assemblies — assembly load options and the Assembly
Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9
Select components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Select components with QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Identify components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11
Assembly Navigator display commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12
Activities: Assemblies — more navigator options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15
Part revisions and saving assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Save Work Part Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Summary: Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-17
Adding and constraining components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
General assembly concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Bottom-up assembly modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Add Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Add Component options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Component Preview window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Activities: Adding components — create assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
Move Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Move Component options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12
Assembly constraints and the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
Assembly constraint types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
Create a Touch Align constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Create a Center constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
Create a Concentric constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
Create a Distance constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Create a Fix constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20
Create a Parallel constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-21
Create a Perpendicular constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
Create a Fit constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23
Create a Bond constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-24
Create an Angle constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-25
Constraint Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-26
Constraint Navigator grouping modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28
Show Degrees of Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-32
Activities: Adding and constraining components — constrain . . . . . . . 18-34
Part family members in assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-35
Part family terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-36
Activities: Family of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-37
Projects: Adding and constraining components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-38
Summary: Adding and constraining components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-39
Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Essentials for NX Designers
11
Contents
Drafting application overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
The 3D drafting process in NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
The Drafting interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
Master model concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Create a new master model drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
Create a new drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
Open a drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
Edit a drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Delete a drawing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Change drawing display to monochrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-14
Activities: Drafting – Edit a master model, Create drawings . . . . . . . . 19-15
Drafting View Style and View Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17
Hidden Lines tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-19
Smooth Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
View Creation Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21
View Creation Wizard window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-23
Create a multi-view layout using the View Creation Wizard . . . . . 19-24
Base views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-27
Base View options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-28
Create a Base view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-29
Projected views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-30
Projection lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-31
Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-31
Projected View options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-32
Edit the style of an existing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-33
Drag views on a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-33
Delete views on a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-33
Activities: Drafting — add views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-34
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-35
Create a dimension — general procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-35
Annotation Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-36
Dimension preferences and placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-37
Annotation placement options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-38
Snap Point options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-38
Placement cues for dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-38
Append text to a dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-39
Change text orientation and text arrow placement . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-40
Move a dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-40
Edit a dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-41
Change the precision of a dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-41
Inherit preferences from an existing dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-42
Activities: Drafting — dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-43
Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-44
Helper lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-44
Create a note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-45
12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Contents
Create a label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-46
Edit an existing note or label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-47
Activities: Drafting — Notes and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-48
Projects: Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-49
Summary: Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-50
Practice projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Practice Project 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Practice Project 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Practice Project 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Practice Project 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Practice Project 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Practice Project 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Practice Project 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Practice Project 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Practice Project 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Practice Project 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Practice Project 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Practice Project 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Practice Project 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Practice Project 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Practice Project 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Practice Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Practice Project 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Practice Project 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Practice Project 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Practice Project 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Practice Project 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Practice Project 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Practice Project 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Practice Project 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
Practice Project 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
Expression operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precedence and associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legacy unit conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built-in functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scientific notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-5
Point options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Point dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Point types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Primitive solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Essentials for NX Designers
13
Contents
Primitive solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Features with predefined shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Rectangular slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Other slot types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Thru slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Rectangular pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Rectangular pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
Positioning a Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-7
Positioning methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Point onto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Point onto Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Parallel at a distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
Line onto line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
Edit positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
Add dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
Edit dimension value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
Delete dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Display dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Defaults levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Defaults environment variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER, GROUP, and SITE directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing your changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating to a new release of NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-2
F-3
F-5
F-6
F-7
F-8
F-9
Custom Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
User-Defined Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Create a User Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Activity: Create a User Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Contents
Edit a User Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Create a Group Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
Activity: Create a Role Palette with a Group Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
Protected Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-13
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Essentials for NX Designers
15
Course overview
Intended audience
This course is suited for designers, engineers, manufacturing engineers,
application programmers, NC programmers, CAD/CAM managers, and
system managers who need to manage and use NX.
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this class.
Course objectives
After successfully completing this course, you should be able to:
•
Open and examine NX models.
•
Create and edit parametric solid models.
•
Create and modify basic assembly structures.
•
Create and modify simple drawings.
Lesson format
The general format for lesson content is:
•
Instructor presentation
•
One or more activities
•
Project
Projects allow you to test your new skills without detailed instruction.
Consult your instructor for additional information.
•
Summary
Essentials for NX Designers
17
Course overview
Learning tips
•
Ask questions.
•
Take notes.
•
Confirm important facts by restating them in your own words.
Because later lessons often build on functionality taught in earlier
lessons, it is important that you follow the lessons in the sequence in
which they appear in the Student Guide.
Common symbols
The student manual uses special symbols as shown below.
Design Intent – Information about the task and what must be
accomplished.
Tip — Useful information or advice.
Note — Contains useful information that supplements or emphasizes
the main points.
Example — Shows a possible way that the current topic of discussion
could be used.
Caution — Contains important reminders or information about a task.
Warning — Contains information essential to your success.
NX 8.5 Help Library
The NX 8.5 Help Library is available online any time you need more
information about a function. To access the NX 8.5 Help Library, from the
NX menu bar choose Help→NX Help.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Course overview
Template parts
Template parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any
settings that are part-dependent, which means that they are saved with the
part. This may include non-geometric data such as:
•
A frame of reference, such as a datum coordinate system
•
Commonly used expressions
•
An initial application such as Modeling, Drafting, or Sheet Metal
•
Part attributes, for example, attributes for a parts list
•
Drawing formats
•
User-defined views
•
Layer categories
Choose a template from the New dialog box.
Essentials for NX Designers
19
Course overview
Teamcenter Integration for NX vs. native NX terminology
Teamcenter Integration for NX Term
Item
Item revision
Dataset
Item ID
UGMASTER dataset
UGPART dataset
(specification or manifestation)
Native NX Term
Part
Part revision
Part file
Part number
Master part file
Non-master part file
(for example, a drawing or
manufacturing file)
When you work in NX, you manipulate parts, part revisions, and part files.
These correspond to items, item revisions, and datasets in Teamcenter
Integration for NX and Teamcenter.
20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Course overview
Layer standards
Parts used in this course were created using layer categories the same as or
very similar to those found in the Model template parts.
Layers provide an advanced alternative to display management (Show and
Hide) to organize data.
Layer categories in the Model template parts
Layers
1–10
11–20
21–40
41–60
61–80
81–256
Category
Solids
Sheets
Sketches
Curves
Datums
No category assigned
Description
Solid bodies
Sheet bodies
All external sketches
Non-sketch curves
Planes, axes, coordinate systems
Implementing a layer standard
You may implement or enforce layer standards using any of the methods
below:
•
Create NX Open programs to create a standard part organization and
verify it upon release.
•
Use a macro to create layer categories: Tools→Macro→Playback.
•
Your administrator can enforce company standards by providing suitable
templates.
In this course you may use a layer organization method you anticipate
using in your work.
Essentials for NX Designers
21
1
Lesson
1
NX part files
Purpose
This lesson introduces you to working with NX part files.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Start an NX session.
•
Create a new part file using templates.
•
Use layers to organize your part geometry.
•
Open a part file.
•
Load an assembly.
•
Copy a part file.
•
Close a part file and exit NX.
Essentials for NX Designers
1-1
NX part files
1
Introduction to NX
The first step in working in NX is to log on to a workstation and start an
NX session.
•
Your instructor will provide the steps needed to log in and start NX in
the classroom.
After you start NX, you see the No Part interface. You can change defaults
and preferences, open an existing part file, or create a new part file.
Gateway application
The tools in NX are grouped into a series of applications that support
different major workflows, including creating geometry, building an assembly,
or producing a drawing.
Gateway is the first application you access when you:
•
Create a new blank part file.
•
Open a part file that was saved in Gateway after NX 4.
•
Open a part file that was last saved in NX 3 or earlier.
Gateway allows you to review existing parts.
To create or edit objects within a part, you must start another application,
such as Modeling.
1-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
The NX Window (standard)
In standard display, the menus and toolbars are positioned at the top of
the window and the Resource bar is to the left of the graphics window. This
is the default display.
Toolbar area
Description
Displays information for the
current part file.
Displays menus with lists of
commands.
Displays active toolbars.
Selection bar
Sets selection options.
Cue and Status line
Prompts you for the next action
that you need to take, and displays
messages on functions and actions.
Contains tabs for navigators,
browsers, and palettes.
Lets you switch between standard
and full screen displays.
Lets you create, display, and
modify parts.
Component
#
Title bar
Menu bar
Resource bar
Full screen button
Graphics window
Essentials for NX Designers
1-3
NX part files
1
New file overview
Use the New command to select a template and create a new product file.
•
Standard templates are available and grouped by types, such as Modeling,
Drawing, Simulation, and Manufacturing.
When you create a new file from a template, it has a copy of all the objects
in the template and inherits all its settings.
•
Blank templates are available to create files with no custom content.
•
System administrators can create customized templates based on
company requirements.
After you create the file, NX starts the appropriate application based on the
template. For example, if you select a modeling template, NX will start
Modeling.
A default name and location for the new file is assigned based on customer
default settings for each template type. You can change the name and location
either before you begin work on the file or when you save the file for the
first time in native NX
Templates have the following advantages:
•
They help to enforce company standards.
•
They automatically start the appropriate application.
•
They simplify using master models by defining a master part reference as
you create a new file.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
Menu
1-4
Essentials for NX Designers
Standard→New
File→New
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Benefits of using templates
•
Easy to use and help to enforce company standards.
•
Automatically start the appropriate application.
•
Simplify using master models by defining a master part reference as you
create a new file.
Essentials for NX Designers
1-5
NX part files
1
Create a new file using a template
1. On the Standard toolbar, click New
.
2. Click the tab for the file type you want (1).
3. Select the template you want (2).
4. Type or assign the number and revision information (3).
(Optional) Type the name and path information (3).
You can also type this information when you save the file.
1-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Layers
Layers are used to organize geometry. You can have up to 256 layers in a part
and you can name them and organize them into layer categories.
Choose Format→Layer Settings to open the Layer Settings dialog box, where
you can manipulate layer classifications.
A layer can have any one of four classifications:
Work
Any new geometric object you create goes on the work layer (example:
datums, sketches, solids).
You can use several layers when designing a part, but you work on only
one layer at a time. This is called the work layer.
•
The layer in the Name column of the layer list with the word “(Work)”
next to it is the work layer.
•
Double click on a layer in the Name column as a quick way of making
a layer the work layer.
•
You can make any layer the work layer.
•
Layer 1 is the default work layer when you create a new file.
•
The work layer is always visible and selectable.
Selectable
A selectable layer is a layer in which you can see and select the objects
on that layer.
•
A red checkmark in the check box in the Name column means the
layer is Selectable.
Invisible
An invisible layer is a layer in which you cannot see any of the objects on
that layer in the graphics window.
•
A cleared check box (no checkmark) in the Name column means the
layer is Invisible.
Visible Only
A visible only layer is a layer in which you can see the objects on that
layer, but for many NX commands, cannot select the objects from the
graphics window.
•
A gray checkmark in the Name column and a red checkmark in the
Visible Only column means the layer is Visible Only.
Essentials for NX Designers
1-7
NX part files
1
Example:
Name
1 (Work)
2
21
62
Visible Only
Object Count
3
1
2
5
Categories
Solids
Solids
Sketches
Datums
In the Layer settings above there are four layers:
•
Layer 1 is the work layer. It has three solids which are visible and
selectable. Any new geometry created at this point would reside on this
layer.
•
Layer 2 is visible only, the one solid on this layer is not selectable.
•
Layer 21 is not visible or selectable. The two sketches on this layer do
not currently display.
•
Layer 62 is visible and selectable. The five datums can be seen and used
for reference.
Layer categories in the Model template parts
Layers
1–10
11–20
21–40
41–60
61–80
91–256
1-8
Essentials for NX Designers
Categories
Solids
Sheets
Sketches
Curves
Datums
No category assigned
Description
Solid bodies
Sheet bodies
All external sketches
Non-sketch curves
Planes, axes, coordinate systems
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Show and Hide
Use the show and hide commands to control visibility of objects in the graphics
window. You can focus on selected objects by temporarily hiding other objects.
If you want to examine a component in context within an assembly,
you can select components that are blocking your view and hide them.
When you finish your examination, you can use a show command to
make all the hidden components visible again.
Hidden objects are invisible, but they still remain in the history and
calculations of the part, unlike objects that are suppressed. You can also
produce a similar result, with more effort and up-front planning, by putting
groups of objects on layers and making specific layers invisible.
Where do I find it?
Application
Gateway
Toolbar
Menu
Utility→Show/Hide Drop-down→Show and Hide
Edit→Show and Hide
Essentials for NX Designers
1-9
NX part files
1
Activities: NX part files — Create new
In the NX part files section, do the activity:
•
1-10
Create new part files
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Open file overview
Use the Open command to open an existing product file.
NX part files have a .prt extension.
When a part file is open:
•
The graphics window shows the model in the condition in which it was
last saved.
•
The title bar of the graphics window displays the name of the current
work part.
•
If the part is read only, the words Read Only appear beside the part name.
This means that changes may not be saved in this file.
•
If an Application was not already active, NX starts the application in
which the part was saved.
A loaded part is only a copy of what is stored on disk. Any new work that you
do is not permanent until the part is saved.
Where do I find it?
Application
Gateway
Toolbar
Menu
Standard→Open
File→Open
Essentials for NX Designers
1-11
NX part files
1
Loading an assembly
Use the Assembly Load Options command to configure the way components
of the part you are opening are loaded into memory.
For example, you can specify:
•
How to load parts with multiple versions or revisions.
•
Where to find components when you work in native NX.
•
Whether to load components fully or partially.
•
Which default reference sets are loaded.
Where do I find it?
Menu
Toolbar
Location in Open
dialog box
1-12
Essentials for NX Designers
File→Options→Assembly Load Options
Standard→Open, click Options
Lower left corner
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Part Versions group
The Part Versions group contains the Load list, with options to control how to
find component parts.
•
As Saved loads parts from the directory in which they were saved.
•
From Folder loads parts from the same directory as the parent assembly.
•
From Search Folders loads parts from a list of search directories.
Essentials for NX Designers
1-13
NX part files
1
Assembly Navigator overview
The Assembly Navigator is a window that displays an assembly structure,
component properties, and constraints between member components, in a
hierarchical tree.
You can use the Assembly Navigator to:
•
•
•
•
•
View the assembly structure of the displayed part.
Apply commands to specific components.
Edit the structure by dragging nodes to different parents.
Identify components.
Select a component.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
Resource bar →
On non-Windows platforms, the Assembly Navigator appears in a separate
window.
1-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Assembly Navigator user interface
Assembly Navigator main panel
columns.
Component node.
Preview panel
Dependencies panel
Identifies a specific component,
and shows the hierarchal tree.
Shows information related to
individual components.
Displays the saved part preview
for a selected component.
Displays the parent-child
dependencies for a selected
assembly or piece part node.
Essentials for NX Designers
1-15
NX part files
1
Assembly Navigator hierarchy tree
The hierarchy tree always appears in the left-most column in the main panel
of the Assembly Navigator, regardless of which column is assigned to that
position.
Not all available commands or options are shown in the following table.
Icon
Meaning
The following symbols precede nodes in the tree structure selected.
Container for view sections and component groups.
Expands an assembly or subassembly node.
Collapses an assembly or subassembly node.
Indicates one or more components have been filtered out of the
Assembly Navigator display. This symbol precedes the word
More.
The following icons indicate that their node represents an assembly or
subassembly.
The assembly is the work part or a component of the work part.
The assembly is loaded, but it is neither the work part nor a
component of the work part.
The assembly is not loaded.
Icon
Meaning
The following icons indicate that their node represents a piece part.
The component is the work part or a component of the work
part.
The component is neither the work part nor a component of
the work part.
The component is closed.
Check boxes in the tree diagram beside components
The component is not loaded.
The component is at least partially loaded, but not visible.
The component is at least partially loaded and visible.
The part is suppressed.
1-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Displayed part and work part
There are two identifiers for loaded parts:
Displayed part
The displayed part is the part that is displayed in the
graphics window.
Work part
The work part is the part in which you create and edit
geometry.
A part can be both the work part and the displayed part or only the displayed
part. You can open or load more than one part at anytime and work on
several parts concurrently.
Changing the displayed part
You can have multiple parts open, or loaded, at the same time. Use the
Window option on the menu bar to control which part is displayed in the
graphics window.
The loaded parts appear in a numbered list. A check mark appears next to
the part that is currently displayed.
1. Loaded parts
2. Displayed part
The Window option works in two ways:
•
Select a part from the list to display. The list contains up to ten recently
displayed parts.
•
Select More to display the Change Window dialog box.
The Change Window dialog box contains a list of all components in an
assembly structure as well as any loaded parts not contained in a loaded
assembly.
Essentials for NX Designers
1-17
NX part files
1
Design in context of an assembly
Design in context is the ability to create or edit component geometry while
the rest of the assembly is visible. In addition, geometry from one component
may be used in the design of another component. An example would be using
faces or edges from one component to define an extruded feature in another
component.
Design in context allows you to control the components that are loaded and
visible. To edit a component in an assembly, you must make it the work part.
The work part can be:
•
The top level of the assembly.
•
A component subassembly.
•
A component piece part.
Design in context and reference sets
By default, when you make a component the work part, NX displays it using
the Entire Part reference set. This setting is controlled by the Display as
Entire Part check box in the Assemblies Preferences dialog box.
1-18
•
Design in context is sometimes call edit in place in other CAD
software.
•
When working in design in context, the work parts units must be
the same as the displayed assembly units.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Make Displayed Part and Set Displayed Part
Use the Make Displayed Part and Set Displayed Part commands to switch
the display between currently loaded parts.
•
The Make Displayed Part option is available on the shortcut list when
you right-click either a part in the graphics area or a node in the Part
Navigator.
•
The Set Displayed Part option is available when using
Assemblies→Context Control or the Assemblies toolbar.
When a part is the displayed part, it becomes the top node of the Assembly
Navigator display.
Use the Maintain option in the Preferences → Assemblies dialog box to
control whether the current work part remains the work part when you
change the displayed part.
The displayed part and the work part must always have the same units. For
example, you cannot have the displayed part in inches and the work part in
millimeters.
Where do I find it?
Application
Assemblies
Toolbar
Menu
Assemblies→Set Displayed Part
Assemblies→Context Control→Set Displayed Part
Right-click a component in the graphics window→Make
Displayed Part
Graphics window
Right-click a component node in the Assembly
Navigator→Make Displayed Part
Essentials for NX Designers
1-19
NX part files
1
Make Work Part and Set Work Part
Use the Make Work Part or Set Work Part command to specify the part in
which to create objects and geometry. This gives you the ability to design in
the context of an assembly.
Partially loaded parts
The work part is automatically fully loaded.
Work part display
You can choose Preferences→Assemblies and select the Display as Entire
Part check box to show all geometry that is visible by layer settings and not
hidden.
When the work part has the Entire Part reference set display condition you
can see and use all objects in the part — such as datums, wire frame geometry,
and sketches — as you continue your design in the context of the assembly.
Occurrences
When your assembly has multiple occurrences of a component, it may not be
clear which occurrence becomes the work part. If you choose the name from a
list, or choose a packed node in the Assembly Navigator, the work part can
seem to be a random occurrence. If a particular occurrence is preferable to
you as the work part, perhaps because it is in a convenient location, you
can select its specific node in the navigator or its specific occurrence in the
graphic window.
Emphasis
You can use the emphasis options to emphasize the work part by changing
the rest of the assembly to the predefined de-emphasis color. The emphasis
options are available in the Visualization Preferences dialog box. You can
emphasize the work part by choosing Preferences→Visualization, clicking
the Emphasis tab, expanding the Session Settings group if necessary, and
selecting the Work Part check box. The work part retains its assigned colors.
When you are working in a large assembly, a color difference helps to visually
differentiate the work part geometry from the rest of the displayed part.
1-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Limitations
The Make Work Part command is unavailable, and the Set Work Part
command will not change the work part, if:
•
The selected component has different units than the displayed part.
•
The current application does not support design in context, for example,
the Drafting application when a drawing is displayed.
•
You have an unrelated dialog box open.
•
The component is not currently visible because it is excluded by the
current reference set.
•
The component is not loaded.
Where do I find it?
Application
Assemblies
Toolbar
Menu
Assemblies→Make Work Part
Assemblies→Context Control→Set Work Part
Right-click a component in the graphics window→Make
Work Part
Right-click a component in the Assembly
Navigator→Make Work Part
In the Assembly Navigator, double-click a node.
Shortcut menu
In the graphics window, double-click a component with
visible geometry.
Essentials for NX Designers
1-21
NX part files
1
Save As
Use the File→Save As command to save the current part under a different
name and/or in a different directory.
The name/location must be unique within the current directory. If you
specify a name that already exists, an error message displays. The current
part is filed under the new name, and the new part file name displays on
the graphics window.
1-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Close selected parts
1. Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.
2. In the Close Part dialog box, select parts to close from a list.
3. Click OK.
Essentials for NX Designers
1-23
NX part files
1
Exit an NX session
Step 1:
Choose File→Exit
If no files have been modified, the NX session ends. If you have
modified any files and have not saved them, you will see a warning
message:
You have an open files that are modified.
Do you want to save them before exiting?
Step 2:
Choose one of the following options:
To save all modified files and exit, click Yes - Save and Exit.
To close all files and exit without saving any changes, click
No - Exit.
To cancel the exit command, click Cancel.
1-24
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
NX part files
1
Activities: NX part files — Open, save, and close
In the NX part files section, do the activity:
•
Open, save, and close existing part files
•
Specify the work part and displayed part
Essentials for NX Designers
1-25
NX part files
1
Summary: NX part files
In this lesson you:
1-26
•
Started an NX session.
•
Created, opened, and saved part files.
•
Learned about how layers can help you organize your part geometry.
•
Copied a part file.
•
Closed a part file.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Lesson
2
The NX user interface
2
Purpose
This lesson introduces the NX user interface.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Customize toolbars.
•
Save and restore toolbars by applying a role.
•
Select objects in the graphics window.
•
Manipulate the orientation of the work view.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-1
The NX user interface
Customize and display toolbars
2
•
Each application has its own set of toolbars. You can hide or display
available toolbars for each application.
•
You can either display or hide available buttons for each toolbar.
•
For each toolbar you can add buttons from other toolbars, or remove them.
•
You can save and share toolbar arrangements for all or selected
applications, using Roles.
Docking toolbars
•
You can dock toolbars horizontally or vertically in the NX window.
•
You can move undocked toolbars on your screen.
Display toolbars
1. Choose Tools→Customize from the main menu bar.
2. On the Toolbars (1) page, select check boxes (2) to display toolbars and
clear to hide them.
Select Text Below Icon (3) to display names on the buttons.
2-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Display toolbars using the shortcut menu
1. Right-click anywhere in the toolbar area (1) to display a shortcut menu of
all toolbars.
2. Select the listed toolbar names to display toolbars or clear the check boxes
to hide them (2).
Empty check boxes are not displayed beside menu items that are
not selected.
You can also select Customize (3) to open the Customize dialog box.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-3
2
The NX user interface
Add or remove toolbar buttons
Toolbar options are an efficient way to turn on and off the display of buttons
within a toolbar.
2
1. Click Toolbar Options on a toolbar and select Add or Remove Buttons.
2. Select a toolbar to modify, or select Customize to open the Customize
dialog box.
3. Click an item with no check box to display it. Clear the check box to hide
an item.
2-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Access options on undocked toolbars
Access toolbar options on undocked toolbars as shown below.
2
Essentials for NX Designers
2-5
The NX user interface
Command Finder
Use Command Finder to find and activate a specific NX command that is
associated with one or more words or phrases. This includes commands that
may not be active in the current application or task environment.
2
Results are limited to commands available in the main menus or on
toolbars. Commands contained only on background shortcut menus or
in navigators are not included in the search.
From the list of commands you can:
•
Display the command location, when it is available in the current
environment.
•
Launch the command, if it is available.
•
Turn on a toggle command, when it is available in the current
environment.
•
Access the Help information for the command.
When a command is not available, Command Finder either states that the
command is unavailable or identifies the application in which the command
is available.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
Menu
2-6
Essentials for NX Designers
Standard→Command Finder
Help→Command Finder
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Search for a command
1. On the Standard toolbar, click Command Finder
Help→Command Finder.
, or choose
2
2. In the Search box, type one or more words or phrases.
3. Click Find Command
or press Enter.
4. Place the cursor over any command presented in the Matches for list.
If the command is available for immediate use, the correct menu path or
toolbar button is highlighted.
5. (Optional) Click any available command in the list to immediately
activate it.
6. (Optional) Right-click a command in the list and choose Help to display
additional information about the command.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-7
The NX user interface
Dialog boxes
Most command dialog boxes in NX focus on the task and present options in
a top down workflow.
2
Options are presented in groups. For consistency, dialog boxes for different
commands present the same groups of options for often repeated actions such
as selecting chains of curves, specifying points, or specifying vectors. You can
expand or collapse groups.
#
Component
Title bar
Groups
Collapsed groups
Less/More button
OK, Apply, Cancel confirmation
buttons
The OK and Apply confirmation buttons are available only when all the
required actions for the command are complete.
When you resize a dialog box, the custom size is not retained after you
close the dialog box.
2-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Title bar options in dialog boxes
The following table lists the options that appear in the title bar of dialog boxes.
Option
Dialog Options
Description
2
Lets you
•
Hide all dialog box groups that are currently
collapsed.
This simplifies the display of the dialog box.
Reset
•
Show all dialog box groups that are currently
collapsed.
•
Turn Less or More dialog options on or off
for the dialog box.
•
Save a dialog box layout as a favorite.
• Open a favorite dialog box layout.
Resets dialog box input values to the default
values.
•
When editing a feature, the default values
are the values used when the feature was
created.
•
To reset to the default values, you need to be
in the More or Less version of the dialog box
Close
Closes the dialog box.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-9
The NX user interface
Less and More dialog box layouts
NX displays Less and More layouts of command dialog boxes. The layout
that you see depends on your role.
2
You can control whether NX displays the Less or More layout by default,
using the Default Dialog Layout User Interface preference.
To find the User Interface preference, choose Preferences→User
Interface and click the General tab.
You can have easy access to simplified or full layouts of command dialog
boxes. NX matches the simplicity or complexity of the command dialog box
to your NX role.
2-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Dialog box actions
The three action buttons along the bottom of the dialog box determine how
the command parameters are processed.
2
OK – Accepts all dialog box parameters and settings but leaves the dialog
box open for further input.
<OK> – Implies an OK if another command is selected.
Apply – Applies all the dialog box parameters and settings but leaves the
dialog box open for further input.
Cancel – Closes the dialog box without processing the dialog box parameters
and settings.
You can temporarily hide the dialog box by clicking the center of the title bar
of the dialog box. Click it again to show it.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-11
The NX user interface
Visual cues in dialog boxes
Dialog boxes use visual cues to help guide you through the selection process.
Cue
2
Description
A fading band indicates the current selection
option.
The objects you select in the graphics window
for the current selection option are displayed
in the selection color.
This icon indicates a required selection.
This icon indicates a required selection that has
been made by you or inferred by the software.
This green color indicates the next default
action.
•
Click the middle mouse button or press
Enter to accept the default action and
advance to the next step.
•
The OK button is the default action after all
required selections and entries are made.
The OK button displays brackets when auto
complete is available.
2-12
Essentials for NX Designers
•
Command dialog boxes that have a preview
have the auto complete capability.
•
Select another command and the current
command completes and opens the dialog
box for the next command.
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Snap a dialog box
You can snap a dialog box so that it appears in a consistent location on your
screen. In NX, you can snap dialog boxes to:
•
The horizontal and vertical borders of the graphics window.
•
The vertical border of the Resource bar.
2
This procedure shows you how to snap a dialog box to the top of the graphics
window.
1. Drag the title bar of the dialog box close to the top of the graphics window.
The dialog box snaps itself to the location.
2. (Optional) If you do not want to snap a dialog box, press the Ctrl key and
move the dialog box to your preferred location.
Dialog box snapping is supported only in the Windows operating system.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-13
The NX user interface
Roles
As you define your own roles, you or your administrator can add them to a
palette for others to share.
2
Roles let you control the appearance of the user interface in a number of
ways. For example:
•
The items displayed on the menu bar
•
The buttons displayed on the toolbars
•
Whether button names are displayed below the buttons
Example roles
NX comes with a number of example roles. These give you a choice of starting
points as you customize toolbars to meet your needs.
The roles palette includes these groups:
2-14
•
System Defaults – generic roles for new and advanced users
•
Industry Specific – examples of configurations for various industries
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
•
User – exists after you save one or more personal configurations
2
For those starting to use NX or those who use NX infrequently, one of
the Essentials roles in System Defaults is recommended.
For more information about any role, hold your cursor over its button.
Choose a role
1. In the Resource bar, click the Roles tab
to display the palette.
2. Click the role you want or drag it into the graphics window.
3. Click OK to accept the new role.
Save toolbar configuration between sessions
When you exit an NX session, the current state of your toolbars is saved by
default. They will be the same when you start a new session.
You can control how this is saved:
1. Choose Preferences→User Interface.
2. On the Layout page, select Save layout at exit.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-15
The NX user interface
Activities: User interface — Toolbars and Roles
In the NX user interface section, do the activities:
2
2-16
•
Customize toolbars
•
Create a new user role
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Using the mouse
There are three mouse configurations in common use.
2
On a two-button mouse, use the left (1) and right (3) buttons together when
you need the middle button.
On a three-button mouse, you can use combinations of mouse buttons.
•
Use middle (2) plus right (3) buttons to pan.
•
Use middle (2) plus left (1) buttons to zoom.
Mouse Button
Action
Select or drag objects.
Click OK while in an operator.
Press and hold down while in the graphics window
to rotate the view.
Hold down Shift and the middle mouse button to
pan.
Hold down Ctrl and the middle mouse button to
zoom in or out.
Display shortcut menu with various functions. Also
display action information for currently selected
objects.
Zoom in and out in graphics window. Scroll in lists,
menus, and the Information window.
Rotating mouse wheel
Essentials for NX Designers
2-17
The NX user interface
Here is a summary of things you can do by moving the mouse cursor.
Over buttons on a
toolbar
Over buttons in a
dialog box
Over objects, features
or components in
graphics window
2
2-18
Essentials for NX Designers
Display Balloon Help for the button.
Display the button name.
Pre-highlight objects based on the Selection Type
Filter.
Display the name of the object or feature in a
tooltip.
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Shortcut toolbar
A shortcut toolbar is a toolbar that contains the commands that you are most
likely to use for the selected objects.
If you select one or more objects of the same type, the shortcut toolbar displays
the commands that are specific to the selected object type. If you select
multiple objects of different types, the shortcut toolbar displays commands
that you can use on all the selected object types.
When no dialog box is open and you select one or more objects in the graphics
window, NX displays only the shortcut toolbar.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-19
2
The NX user interface
When no dialog box is open and you right-click one or more selected objects
in the graphics window, the Part Navigator, or the Assembly Navigator, NX
displays the shortcut toolbar and the shortcut menu.
2
2-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
View shortcut toolbar
The View shortcut toolbar is displayed when you:
•
Click in the background of the graphics window.
•
Hold Ctrl and click an object.
2
This shortcut toolbar is displayed only if you customize it by adding
commands to it.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-21
The NX user interface
View shortcut menu
Right-click in the background of the graphics window to display the View
shortcut menu.
2
(1) This menu lists frequently used NX commands.
(2) The Selection mini-bar is a compact version of the Selection bar that
displays in the graphics window whenever the View shortcut menu is in use.
This provides convenient access to selection options close to your cursor
location.
2-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Option
Description
Refreshes the entire graphics window. Erases temporary
Refresh
display entities.
Fits the entire part to the view. Utilizes the fit percentage
Fit
found in the Preferences→Visualization→Screen dialog
box.
Zoom
Fits the view to a user specified rectangle.
Pan
Activates pan mode to pan the view with the cursor.
Rotate
Activates the rotate mode to rotate the view with the cursor.
Provides options which allow you to quickly set up a
True Shading
photo-realistic real time display.
Rendering
Specifies the method of shading and hidden edges in which
Style
the model is displayed.
In a multiple view layout, makes the view where the
Work View
command was selected the current Work view.
Displays the current view in a canned view orientation. The
Orient View original visualization settings and view modifications are
retained. Active only in modeling view.
Set Rotate Defines a point or vector about which the model is rotated.
Reference
Clear Rotate Removes a rotate point that was previously set.
Point
Repeat
Lets you rerun any one of the last ten commands that you
Command
used.
Undo
Removes the effect of the last single operation performed.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-23
2
The NX user interface
Radial toolbars and radial shortcuts
Radial toolbars
2
Radial toolbars are available when you hold Shift+Ctrl and click a mouse
button. The radial toolbar you see depends on the mouse button you click.
Radial shortcuts
Radial shortcuts are available when you click and hold the right mouse
button.
2-24
•
A radial shortcut with view commands appears when you click and hold
the right mouse button in the background of the graphics window.
•
A radial shortcut with object-specific commands appears when you click
and hold the right mouse button on a selected object.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Customizing radial toolbars
Three customizable radial toolbars are available in each NX application. You
can include up to eight commands on each radial toolbars.
2
Radial toolbars are designed to contain different commands for different
applications. To use the same command in the same radial toolbar across
different applications, you must place that command in the radial toolbar
for each application.
Radial toolbars can be customized in NX applications only when you open or
create a part. The No Part application does not support customizable radial
toolbars.
Three customizable radial toolbars
are available in each NX application
Customizable radial toolbar
•
When you hold the Ctrl and Shift
keys and click a mouse button, the
radial toolbar associated with that
button appears.
•
You can include up to eight
commands on each customizable
radial toolbar.
Where do I find it?
Customize options
Menu
Shortcut menu
Location in dialog
box
Tools→Customize
Right-click in the toolbar area→Customize
Toolbars page→Radial 1, Radial 2, or Radial 3
Essentials for NX Designers
2-25
The NX user interface
Modify radial toolbars
1. Make sure you are in the application for the radial toolbar you want to
modify.
2
2. Right-click in the toolbar area and choose Customize, or select
Tools→Customize.
3. To modify a radial toolbar for the left, middle, or right mouse button,
select the Radial 1, Radial 2, or Radial 3 check box respectively. This
example uses Radial 1.
The radial toolbar mapped to the left mouse button appears.
4. In the Customize dialog box, click the Commands tab.
5. In the Categories list, expand the Edit node and select Show and Hide to
display a list of show and hide commands in the Commands box.
Categories:
Application
File
Edit
Undo List
Selection
Show and Hide
...
2-26
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
6. From the Commands box, drag and drop the Hide command onto the
upper left corner of the radial toolbar.
The appearance of the radial toolbar button changes to indicate that the
command can be placed.
The Hide command bitmap appears in the radial toolbar.
7. (Optional) You can continue to drag and drop up to seven additional
commands onto the radial toolbar. However, it is not necessary to fill
the toolbar completely.
You can also drag and drop a command from any standard toolbar,
or from another radial toolbar. To do so, you must first make the
radial toolbar visible by selecting the Radial 2 or Radial 3 check box
on the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog box.
8. (Optional) To remove a command, drag it off the radial toolbar.
9. When you finish adding commands, click Close.
10. Hold Ctrl+Shift and click the left, middle, or right mouse button to display
the customized radial toolbar.
•
If you add an item in a radial toolbar in one application, that item
does not appear on the same radial toolbar in other applications. To
create a uniform radial toolbar across multiple applications, you
must add the items in each application separately.
•
To customize the radial toolbars you must select the Allow Menu
Bar Customization check box on the Customer Defaults dialog box.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-27
2
The NX user interface
Graphics window view manipulation
You can rotate the view by dragging with the middle mouse button. Release
the mouse button to stop rotating.
2
2-28
•
When the cursor is near the left or right vertical edge of the screen,
display rotation is around X-axis of the screen.
•
When the cursor is near the bottom edge of the screen, display rotation is
around Y-axis of the screen.
•
When the cursor is near the top of the screen, display rotation is around
Z-axis of the screen (normal to the screen).
•
If the cursor is in the middle of the graphics window, the axis of rotation is
determined by the direction in which you drag the cursor.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Other view manipulation options
Orient View options
Modifies the orientation of a specified view to a
predefined view.
•
Changes only the alignment of the view, not the
view name.
•
Can be selected from the View toolbar or from
the shortcut menu.
Home key
Orients the current view to Trimetric.
End key
Orients the current view to Isometric.
F8 key
Orients the current view to a selected planar face
or datum plane or the planar view (top, front, right,
back, bottom, left) that is closest to the current view
orientation.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-29
2
The NX user interface
View triad
The View Triad is a visual indicator that represents the orientation of the
Absolute coordinate system of the model.
2
•
The View Triad is displayed in the lower-left corner of the graphics
window.
•
Select an axis of the view triad to lock rotation about that axis only.
X-axis locked
Y-axis locked
Z-axis locked
Click the middle mouse button, press Esc, or click the rotation triad origin
handle to return to normal rotation.
2-30
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Selecting objects
You may either select an object first and then choose a command to perform,
or, choose a command first and then select the required object.
The selection Type Filter allows you to control which type of objects you can
select. The content of the list changes with the active NX command.
When using an advanced role, the General Selection Filters allow you to
further restrict what type of objects you can select.
You can use toolbar options to add many additional buttons to the Selection
bar.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-31
2
The NX user interface
If you right-click an object, a shortcut menu appears with commands for
the object type.
The cursor must be over the object, and the object must be highlighted.
2
The shortcut menu changes depending on the object. The following shortcut
menu is for a typical feature.
Options also vary with the application (Modeling, Drafting,
Manufacturing, etc.)
2-32
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Deselect objects
You can deselect a single object or multiple objects.
•
To deselect a single object, press Shift and click an object.
•
To deselect a group of objects, hold Shift and the left mouse button and
drag the cursor over the objects you want to deselect. Once they are
highlighted, release the buttons.
•
To deselect the object or objects that you selected last, click Deselect
2
on the Selection bar. This option is especially useful when
Last
you want to undo one incorrect selection after you have made a number
of correct selections.
•
To deselect all of your selections, either press Deselect All
Selection bar, or press Esc.
on the
If you deselect one or more selected objects within a selected group,
both the objects and the group are deselected. Other selected objects
within the deselected group remain selected.
Essentials for NX Designers
2-33
The NX user interface
Preview selection
Objects are highlighted in the preview selection color as the selection ball
passes over them.
2
Preview Selection is on by default.
To turn off preview selection: Preferences→Selection→Selection
Preferences dialog box→ clear the Highlight Selection on Rollover check box.
The color of preview highlighting is determined by the Preselection setting
found under Preferences→Visualization→Color Settings.
When you hold the Shift key, the preselection color is applied to currently
selected objects that you can deselect.
Tooltips at the cursor location
View an object’s name or type in a tooltip that appears at the cursor location.
This information is also available on the Status line.
Preselected object with tooltip
Tooltips at the cursor location appear translucent in computers running
on the Windows XP or Windows 7 operating systems.
The tooltips are visible by default.
To turn off these tooltips: Preferences→Selection→Selection Preferences
dialog box→ clear the Object Tooltip on Rollover check box.
Where do I find it?
Menu
Location in dialog
box
2-34
Essentials for NX Designers
Preferences→Selection
Selection Preferences dialog box→ Highlight group
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Selection bar
Use the Selection bar to set and use advanced selection options.
With the Selection bar you can:
2
•
Select objects by filtering them for specific attributes.
•
Specify how to perform multiple selections.
•
Access advanced selection tools, such as Selection Intent and Snap Point.
The Selection bar appears below the toolbars found at the top of the NX
window.
The main components of the Selection bar are:
Selection
Selection Intent
Snap Point
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
Menu
Selection bar
Edit→Selection
Essentials for NX Designers
2-35
The NX user interface
Selection bar Snap Point options
2
Icon
Name
Enable Snap Point
Clear Snap Point
End Point
Mid Point
Control Point
Intersection Point
Arc Center
Select an arc center point.
Quadrant Point
Select one of four quadrant points of a
circle.
Existing Point
Select an existing point.
Point on Curve
Select a point on a curve.
Point on Surface
Select a point on a surface.
Tangent Point
Two-curve
Intersection
Point Dialog
2-36
Description
Use this to turn the Snap Point options
on and off.
Turns off all selected Snap Point
options on the Selection bar.
Select end points of lines, arcs, conics,
splines, and all edge types.
Select mid points of lines, open arcs,
and all edge types.
Select a control point of a geometric
object.
Select a point at the intersection of two
curves.
Essentials for NX Designers
Select a tangent point on circles, conics,
and solid edges.
Select the intersection point of two
objects that do not fit within the
selection ball by selecting two objects.
Open the Point dialog box.
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
QuickPick
When you select objects, more than one object will often be within the selection
ball. QuickPick provides easy browsing through selection candidates.
2
If there is more than one selectable object at the selection ball location
and the cursor lingers for a short period of time, the cursor changes to a
QuickPick indicator:
This cursor display indicates that there is more than one selectable object at
that position. Click after the cursor changes to display the QuickPick dialog
box.
You can change the amount of time the cursor must be stationary for
the QuickPick indicator to appear.
•
Choose Preferences→Selection.
•
In the QuickPick group, change the Delay value (in seconds).
Use the middle mouse button to cycle through the items in the list and
then click when the desired object is highlighted.
Use the buttons in the dialog box to filter the list to include object types:
•
•
•
•
•
•
All Objects
Construction
Features
Body objects
Components
Annotations
Essentials for NX Designers
2-37
The NX user interface
Activities: User Interface — Views
In the NX user interface section, do the activity:
•
2
2-38
Change the view display
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
The NX user interface
Summary: User interface
In this lesson you:
•
Modified the location and contents of toolbars.
•
Applied a role to restore saved toolbar settings.
•
Learned how to use the mouse to quick access to viewing, selection and
other commands.
•
Manipulated the work view orientation.
2
Essentials for NX Designers
2-39
2
Lesson
3
Coordinate systems
3
Purpose
This lesson introduces the coordinate systems that are used in NX.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the differences between the absolute coordinate system (ABS)
and the work coordinate system (WCS).
•
Move the WCS.
•
Obtain geometry information relative to the WCS.
Essentials for NX Designers
3-1
Coordinate systems
Coordinate systems
There are different coordinate systems in NX. A three-axis symbol is used to
identify a coordinate system.
The intersection of the axes is called the origin of the coordinate system.
The coordinate values of the origin are X = 0, Y = 0, and Z = 0. Each axis line
represents the positive direction for that axis.
3
You can define planes and coordinate systems for constructing geometry.
These planes are completely independent of the viewing direction.
The most frequently used coordinate systems for design and model creation
are:
•
Absolute Coordinate System
There is one absolute coordinate system. It is not visible or movable. The
direction of the global coordinate system axes are the same as the View
Triad (shown above), but not its origin.
•
Work Coordinate System (WCS)
There is one movable Work Coordinate System.
3-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Coordinate systems
•
Datum coordinate system
3
You can create as many datum coordinate systems as you need.
Datum coordinate systems are not addressed in this lesson. They are
addressed in depth in the Datum Features lesson.
Essentials for NX Designers
3-3
Coordinate systems
Absolute coordinate system
The Absolute coordinate system is a conceptual location and orientation in
model space. Think of the Absolute coordinate system as X = 0, Y = 0, Z = 0.
It is invisible and cannot be moved.
The Absolute coordinate system:
3
•
Defines a fixed point and orientation in model space.
•
Relates the location and orientation between different objects.
An object positioned at the absolute coordinates of X = 1.0, Y =
1.0, and Z = 1.0 in one particular part file, is in exactly the same
absolute position in any other part file.
The View Triad is a visual indicator that represents the orientation of the
Absolute coordinate system of the model. The View Triad is displayed in the
lower-left corner of the graphics window. You can rotate a model around a
specific axis on the View Triad.
3-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Coordinate systems
WCS
The Work Coordinate System (WCS) is a right hand Cartesian coordinate
system, made up of the XC, YC, and ZC axes that are 90 degrees apart from
each other.
•
The intersection of the axes is called the origin of the coordinate system.
•
The origin has coordinate values of X= 0, Y= 0, Z= 0.
•
The XC-YC plane of the WCS is called the work plane.
3
You can use the WCS to reference the location and orientation of objects in
model space. For example you can use it to:
•
Create primitives.
•
Define a sketch plane.
•
Create a fixed datum axis or plane.
Because the WCS is a mobile coordinate system, you can move it anywhere
in the graphics window to construct geometry in different orientations and
locations.
Essentials for NX Designers
3-5
Coordinate systems
•
Although you can save multiple coordinate systems in a part file,
only one of them can be the WCS.
•
Most modeling operations in NX do not require manual
manipulation of the WCS because features are added to a model
relative to existing geometry.
Where do I find it?
3
Toolbar
Menu
3-6
Essentials for NX Designers
All WCS commands are available on the Utility toolbar.
Format→WCS
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Coordinate systems
WCS options
You can access WCS options from the Utility toolbar or by choosing
Format→WCS on the menu bar.
Options available to manipulate the WCS include:
Dynamics
Use handles to adjust the origin and
orientation.
Origin
Specify the location without changing the
orientation.
Rotate
Specify rotations in a dialog box
Orient
Use a dialog box with Dynamic, Absolute,
Current View, and several other methods.
Set WCS to
Absolute
Use to move the WCS to the position and
orientation of the absolute CSYS.
Change YC
Direction
Use a dialog box with several options to specify
the YC axis.
Display
Show or hide the WCS.
Save
Create a CSYS geometry entity at the current
WCS origin and orientation.
Essentials for NX Designers
3
3-7
Coordinate systems
WCS Dynamics overview
Use WCS Dynamics to manipulate the location and orientation of the WCS.
You can enter WCS Dynamics at any time and it supports the Undo function.
3
1. Translation (arrow heads)
2. Rotation (small spheres)
3. Origin (large sphere)
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
Menu
Shortcut menu
3-8
Essentials for NX Designers
Utility→WCS Dynamics
Format→WCS→Dynamics
Double-click the WCS in the graphics window
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Coordinate systems
Position the WCS
Use WCS Dynamics
dynamically.
to move the Work Coordinate System (WCS)
Move the WCS
1. Turn on WCS Dynamics in one of these ways:
•
Double-click the WCS.
•
On the Utility toolbar, click WCS Dynamics
•
Choose Format→WCS→Dynamics.
3
.
2. Select the Origin handle on the WCS and drag it to the desired location.
3. Turn off WCS Dynamics in one of these ways:
•
Press Esc.
•
Click the middle mouse button.
•
On the Utility toolbar, click WCS Dynamics
•
Choose Format→WCS→Dynamics.
.
Essentials for NX Designers
3-9
Coordinate systems
Move the WCS origin to a point
The example shows how to move the WCS origin to an end point on the
geometry.
1. Turn on WCS Dynamics.
2. Select the Origin handle on the WCS.
3
3. On the Selection bar, turn on End Point
.
4. Drag the WCS to an end point on the geometry.
3-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Coordinate systems
Move the WCS origin to a specified location
1. Turn on WCS Dynamics.
2. Select the Origin handle on the WCS.
3. On the Selection bar, click Point Constructor
.
4. In the Point dialog box, in the Coordinates group, enter XC, YC, and ZC
values.
The WCS origin moves to the specified location.
Move the WCS along an axis
1. Turn on WCS Dynamics.
2. To select a direction, click an arrowhead on an axis handle.
3. Move the WCS along the selected axis in one of these ways:
•
Drag the WCS to the desired location.
•
In the on-screen input box, enter a Distance value and press Enter.
Essentials for NX Designers
3-11
3
Coordinate systems
Reorient the WCS
Use WCS Dynamics
dynamically.
to reorient the Work Coordinate System (WCS)
Rotate the WCS
1. Turn on WCS Dynamics in one of these ways:
3
•
Double-click the WCS.
•
On the Utility toolbar, click WCS Dynamics
•
Choose Format→WCS→Dynamics.
.
2. Rotate the WCS to the desired angle in one of these ways:
3-12
•
Place the cursor over any of the three spherical handles on the WCS,
and drag to the desired angle.
•
Enter values in the Angle and Snap boxes in the on-screen input box.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Coordinate systems
The default values in the on-screen input boxes indicate current angle
and snap increment.
3
3. Turn off WCS Dynamics in one of these ways:
•
Press Esc.
•
Click the middle mouse button.
•
On the Utility toolbar, click WCS Dynamics
•
Choose Format→WCS→Dynamics.
.
Essentials for NX Designers
3-13
Coordinate systems
Reorient the WCS to an object
1. Turn on WCS Dynamics.
2. Select one of the WCS axes.
3
3. Select a object, such as an edge, to which you want to align the WCS.
The WCS re-orients to be parallel with the object, without relocating the
origin.
4. (Optional) Specify a vector.
a. Click Vector Constructor
on the WCS dialog bar.
b. Select a option from the Type list, or click on a object in the graphics
window.
3-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Coordinate systems
Reverse the Direction of the WCS
1. Turn on WCS Dynamics.
2. Double-click one of the WCS axes.
3
Before
After
Essentials for NX Designers
3-15
Coordinate systems
Activities: Coordinate systems
In the Coordinate Systems section, do the activity:
•
Manipulate the WCS for design analysis
3
3-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Coordinate systems
Summary: Coordinate systems
The absolute coordinate system is a stationary coordinate system that defines
a fixed point in model space while the work coordinate system (WCS) is a
mobile coordinate system that may be moved and reoriented as necessary
to support other commands.
In this lesson you:
•
Identified the difference between the absolute coordinate system and
the work coordinate system.
•
Relocated, rotated, and reoriented the WCS.
•
Obtained geometry information relative to the WCS.
Essentials for NX Designers
3
3-17
3
Lesson
4
Sketching
Purpose
This lesson introduces the methods of creating a sketch.
Objectives
4
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Identify design intent and a modeling strategy.
•
Create a sketch.
•
Create sketch curves.
•
Apply dimensional constraints to sketches.
•
Apply geometric constraints to sketches.
•
Identify constraints.
•
Convert sketch curves and constraints to reference status.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-1
Sketching
Sketch overview
A Sketch is a named set of 2D curves and points located on a specified plane
or path. You can apply rules, in the form of geometric and dimensional
constraints, to establish the criteria your design needs. Features created from
a sketch are associated with it; if the sketch changes so do the features.
You can use sketches to create:
•
The profile or typical sections of your design.
•
Detailed part features by sweeping, extruding, or revolving a sketch into a
solid or a sheet body.
•
Large-scale 2D concept layouts with hundreds, or even thousands, of
sketch curves.
•
Construction geometry, such as a path of motion, or a clearance arc, that
is not meant to define a part feature.
4
In a sketch, you can create as many, or as few constraints as your design
requires. That means you can use a sketch to create wireframe drawings
that can serve a wide variety of up-front design purposes, and are not meant
for down-stream processing.
For example you might create 2D layout sketches for products where you
focus on:
•
•
•
Product structure
Component layout
Basic component shape
Or you might create construction geometry including:
•
•
•
•
Area/volume restrictions in a part
Range/arc of free motion
Part labels or logos
Layout of grille holes
Sketches like these typically require few, if any, constraints.
4-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketch in Place
Sketch on an existing planar face, or on a new or existing sketch plane. Key
considerations that will guide your selection are:
•
Does the sketch define the base feature for the part? If so, create the
sketch on an appropriate datum plane or datum coordinate system.
•
Is the sketch adding to an existing base feature? If so, select an existing
datum plane or part face, or create a new datum plane with an appropriate
relationship to existing datum planes or part geometry.
Sketch on Path
This is a specialized type of constrained sketch that you use to create a profile
for a Variational Sweep feature. You can also use Sketch on Path to position
a sketch for features like Extrude and Revolve. For all commands, you select
the target path and define a sketch plane location on that path.
You can use the Reattach command to easily switch a sketch from the
Sketch in Place method to Sketch on Path.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-3
4
Sketching
Establishing design intent and a modeling strategy
Before creating a parametric model, you should first establish the design
intent of the part. This is an important step that will determine the modeling
strategy to use and should be a standard practice.
There are two items to consider when establishing design intent:
•
Design considerations
o
o
•
Potential areas for change
o
o
4
What are the functional requirements of the part?
What are the relationships between features on the part?
o
What portions of the model are subject to change?
What is the scope of the changes? (Do you expect drastic topology
changes?)
Will the model be copied and modified for other projects?
Design intent can be based on a number of factors:
•
•
•
•
Known information
Form, fit, and function requirements
Manufacturing requirements
External equations
The design intent will determine the modeling strategy and the following
types of tasks:
•
•
•
•
•
Selecting feature types (features, feature operations, sketches)
Establishing feature relationships (size, attachment, position, order)
Defining sketch constraints
Creating expressions (equations, conditions)
Establishing relationships between parts (interpart expressions, linked
geometry)
It is possible to add design intent to a model after the initial
construction. However, the amount of rework will depend on the
modeling techniques originally used.
4-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Ways to use sketches
There are many ways that you can use sketches.
Any feature created from a sketch is associative and will update with any
changes made.
•
You can revolve a sketch
.
4
•
You can extrude a sketch
.
•
You can create swept features
.
Both the guide and the section strings can be created in a sketch.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-5
Sketching
•
You can use multiple sketches as generator profiles for sheet bodies.
•
You can use a combination of sketch types in variational sweep
.
4
A sketch can also be used as a law curve to govern the shape of a model or
feature.
4-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketches and Layers
•
You can Hide and Show sketches from the Part Navigator. You do not
need to put each sketch on a different layer to control its visibility.
•
Layers can also be used as an organization tool for sketches.
•
While working in an external sketch, all the objects you create reside on
the same layer.
Internal sketches reside with the parent feature unless you
manually move the sketch to another layer.
•
When you add curves to a sketch directly in an application, they are
created on the same layer as the sketch.
•
When you open a sketch in the Sketch task environment, the layer that
the sketch resides on becomes the work layer.
•
When you exit the Sketch task environment, the layer settings depend
on whether you selected the Maintain Layer Status check box in the
Preferences→Sketch→Session Settings dialog box.
o
If you select the check box, the sketch layer and work layer are
returned to the status they had before you activated the sketch.
o
If you clear the check box, the sketch layer continues to be the work
layer.
Essentials for NX Designers
4
4-7
Sketching
General process for using sketches
When you want to use sketches in your model, follow this general process:
•
•
•
•
Establish your design intent.
Check and set the sketch preferences.
Create the sketch and the sketch geometry.
Constrain the sketch according to your design intent.
4
4-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Direct Sketch and the Sketch task environment
The Direct Sketch toolbar and the Sketch task environment offer two modes
you can use to create and edit sketches. Siemens PLM Software recommends
that you:
Use the Direct Sketch toolbar when you want to:
• Create or edit a sketch in the Modeling, Shape Studio, or Sheet Metal
applications.
•
See the effect of sketch changes on the model in real-time.
Use the Sketch task environment when you want to:
• Edit an internal sketch.
•
Experiment with sketch changes, but retain the option to discard all
the changes.
•
Create a sketch in other applications.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-9
4
Sketching
Direct sketching
A Direct Sketch toolbar is available in Modeling. Use the commands on
this toolbar to create a sketch on a plane without entering the Sketch task
environment.
When you create a point or curve using the commands on this toolbar, a
sketch is created and is active. The new sketch is listed in the model history
in the Part Navigator. The first point you specify defines the sketch plane,
orientation, and origin.
You can define the first point on the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4
Screen position
Point
Curve
Face
Plane
Edge
Specified Plane
Specified Datum CSYS
Why should I use it?
Direct sketching requires fewer mouse clicks, which makes creating and
editing sketches faster and easier.
Where do I find it?
Application
Toolbar
4-10
Essentials for NX Designers
Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal
Direct Sketch
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketch Task Environment overview
The Sketch Task Environment command lets you create or edit a sketch in
NX while allowing full control over the creation and edit process.
The Sketch Task Environment is similar to a separate application, where
the interface changes to focus on the current toolset, but you are still in the
Modeling application. All the toolbars shown support the sketch tool.
For many features where internal sketching is supported, the Sketch Task
Environment is the method used to create or edit the sketch.
Working in the Sketch Task Environment allows the following:
•
The ability to control the sketch creation options during sketch creation.
•
Access to all the sketch tools.
•
The option to work in 2D or 3D space. (The default is orient to 2D)
•
The ability to control the update behavior of the model.
4
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Feature → Sketch in Task Environment
Insert → Sketch in Task Environment
Essentials for NX Designers
4-11
Sketching
Create Sketch overview
Use the Sketch command when you need to:
•
Define the sketch Orientation and Origin, in a manner that is not
available using the quick pick method.
•
Create a sketch On Path or associated to the edge of a solid.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
Direct Sketch→Sketch
4
Menu
Feature→Sketch in Task Environment
Insert→Sketch
Insert→Sketch in Task Environment
4-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketch On Plane
Create a Sketch On Plane when you want to associate the sketch feature to
a planar object such as a datum plane or a face.
1. Sketch on the plane of a Datum
CSYS
2. Sketch on a face of the
extruded sketch.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-13
4
Sketching
Create a sketch on a plane or planar face
1. To begin sketching, do one of the following:
•
On the Direct Sketch toolbar, click Sketch
.
•
On the Feature toolbar, click Sketch in Task Environment
.
You can also start a sketch by selecting a command on the Direct
Sketch toolbar, such as Profile
.
2. Define the sketch plane by selecting an existing planar face or plane.
The first pick defines the sketch plane, the sketch orientation and origin.
4
Plane
Face
When using a Direct Sketch command, the first pick also defines
the first point for the curve.
You can hold the Alt key and select the face to define the plane
without defining the first point.
4-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
3. Create sketch curves.
NX is a counterclockwise system. If you create your profile
counterclockwise, the automatic dimensions are on the outside of
profile. If you create your profile clockwise, the dimensions are on
the inside of the profile.
4
Profile created counterclockwise
Profile created clockwise
4. Define needed sketch constraints or dimensions.
5. Choose Finish Sketch
, or if you are using Direct Sketch, you can
choose another command.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-15
Sketching
Sketch reference direction
When you choose a reference direction, vertical or horizontal, you determine
either the positive X or Y direction for your sketch.
NX is a counterclockwise system. Your sketch final Z axis orientation should
point towards you in the graphics window. This ensures that your sketch
will respond according to positive feature creation assumptions and the
right hand rule.
1. Sketch plane
2. Sketch Origin and CSYS.
The final orientation of
the sketch is based on this
preview CSYS.
4
3. Sketch Orientation. The
horizontal reference
direction is used to properly
orient the sketch.
4-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Intermediate Datum CSYS
NX can automatically create an Intermediate Datum CSYS when you create
or reattach a sketch. By default, the Intermediate Datum CSYS is internal to
the sketch. It is not visible outside the sketch or in the model history in the
Part Navigator.
Why should I use it?
Select this option to associate the Intermediate Datum CSYS to the base
feature used to create the sketch. This option also gives the sketch
independence so that if you delete the base feature the sketch remains.
You can make this Datum CSYS:
•
External from the sketch when you right-click the sketch in the Part
Navigator and choose Make Datums External.
•
Internal to the sketch when you right-click the sketch in the Part
Navigator and choose Make Datums Internal.
4
Where do I find it?
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Sketch
(Sketch task environment) Feature→Sketch in Task
Toolbar
Environment
(Modeling) Insert→Sketch
Menu
Location in dialog
box
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Sketch in Task
Environment
Sketch Plane group→Inferred
Settings group→Create Intermediate Datum CSYS
Essentials for NX Designers
4-17
Sketching
Name sketches in the Modeling application
To name a sketch in the Modeling application use the Sketch Properties
dialog box.
1. In the Part Navigator or in the graphics window, right click the sketch
and choose Properties.
2. Click the General tab.
3. In the Name box, type the new sketch name.
4. Click OK.
4
4-18
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Name sketches in Sketch Task Environment
Sketches are assigned a default name with a numeric suffix such as Sketch
(1) “SKETCH_000”.
Once you name your sketch the new name displays in the Part Navigator, for
example, Sketch (2) “BASE”.
4
1. On the Sketch toolbar, clear the contents of the Sketch Name box.
2. Type a new name and press Enter.
It is recommended that you name your sketch when no other sketch
commands are active.
If your new sketch name does not appear in the Part Navigator,
make sure Timestamp Order is in effect.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-19
Sketching
Finish Sketch
Use the Finish Sketch command to exit a sketch and return to the application
or command you started sketching from.
Where do I find it?
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Finish Sketch
(Sketch task environment) Sketch Tools→Finish
4
Toolbar
Menu
(Modeling) File→Finish Sketch
Keyboard
(Sketch task environment) Task→Finish Sketch
Ctrl+Q
Sketch
Exit Sketch
Use the Exit Sketch command to exit the Sketch task environment without
doing the following:
•
Saving the modified sketch.
•
Updating the model.
The Exit Sketch command restores the part to the state it was prior to
entering the Sketch task environment while avoiding the unnecessary step of
updating all features downstream of the sketch.
Why should I use it?
Use this command when you want to do the following:
•
Explore and edit sketch curves and constraints without changing sketches
and the model permanently.
•
Discard sketch edits made since you entered the Sketch task environment.
Where do I find it?
Task environment Sketch
Menu
Task→Exit Sketch
4-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Direct sketch and feature edit preferences
Set the following options in the Modeling Preferences dialog box to determine
the actions available when you double-click sketches and features.
Edit tab
Edit Sketch Action
Direct Edit
Lets you edit the sketch directly in Modeling.
Task Environment
Enters the Sketch task environment.
Double-click Action
(Sketches)
Edit with Rollback
Makes the selected sketch the current feature and
enters the Sketch task environment.
Edit
Enters the direct sketch mode without changing the
current feature.
Double-click Action
(Features)
Edit with Rollback
Makes the selected feature the current feature and
enters the edit mode.
Edit
Enters the feature edit mode without changing the
current feature.
To edit sketches directly in Modeling, you should:
•
Set Double-click Action (Sketches) to Edit with Rollback.
•
Set Edit Sketch Action to Direct Edit.
•
Right click the sketch and choose
Edit.
Where do I find it?
Application
Menu
Location in dialog
box
Modeling
Preferences→Modeling
Edit tab
Essentials for NX Designers
4-21
4
Sketching
Activities: Sketching
In the Sketching section, do the activities:
•
Create a sketch profile directly in the Modeling application
•
Sketch in Task Environment
•
Create a sketch on a persistent Datum CSYS
4
4-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketch curves
Sketching commands are available on both the Direct sketching toolbar and
in the Sketch Task Environment.
The following is a chart of the essential sketching commands. Not all
available commands are shown.
Profile
Line
Arc
Circle
Rectangle
Studio Spline
Creates a series of connected lines
and/or arcs in string mode; that is
the end of the last curve becomes
the beginning of the next curve.
Creates lines with constraint
inferences.
Creates and arc through three
points or by specifying its center
and end points.
Creates a circle through three
points or by specifying its center
and diameter.
Creates a rectangle using any of
three different methods.
Dynamically creates and edits
splines by dragging defining
points or poles, and assigning
slope or curvature constraints at
defining points.
Point
Creates points.
Offset Curve
Offsets a chain of curves,
projected curves, or curves/edges
in the sketch. Symmetric offset
is also available.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-23
4
Sketching
Sketch help lines
Help lines indicate alignment to control points of curves, including line
endpoints and midpoints, arc endpoints, and arc and circle center points. Two
types of help lines can display during curve creation:
•
A dotted help line indicates alignment with other objects.
•
A dashed help line indicates an inferred constraint with other objects,
such as horizontal, vertical, perpendicular and tangent.
1. Dotted help line aligned with
midpoint.
4
2. Dashed help line with vertical
constraint.
4-24
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Short List
NX maintains a memory of five objects called the short list to check for
inferred constraints. NX uses the short list to avoid testing against every
curve in the current sketch when inferring constraints. Curves are added to
the list as you create them or when you pass your cursor over a curve.
When NX infers a constraint between an object on the short list and the
curve being created, the short list object highlights and you see a preview
of the constraint.
4
•
The short list is structured from top to bottom. When curves are
created or passed over with the cursor, they are placed on top of the
short list. When the list is full, the curve at the bottom is removed
before adding a new curve at the top.
•
NX clears the short list when you leave a curve command.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-25
Sketching
Continuous Auto Dimensioning
Use the Continuous Auto Dimensioning command to automatically
dimension sketch curves after each operation.
This command uses auto dimensioning rules to fully constrain the active
sketch, including positioning dimensions to the parent Datum CSYS.
You can set auto dimensioning rules from the following:
4
•
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions
•
File→Utilities→Customer Defaults→Sketch→Inferred Constraints and
Dimensions→Dimensions
The Continuous Auto Dimensioning command creates the automatic
dimension type of sketch dimension.
Automatic dimensions fully constrain a sketch. The dimensions are updated
as you drag the sketch curves. They remove degrees of freedom from the
sketch but do not lock the values permanently. If you add a constraint that
conflicts with an automatic dimension, the automatic dimension is deleted.
You can convert automatic dimensions into driving dimensions.
Why should I use it?
In Modeling, use this command to ensure you are always working with a fully
constrained sketch which will be updated predictably.
In Drafting, use this command to automatically create dimensions for all the
curves that you create in a drawing.
4-26
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling)
Direct Sketch→Continuous Auto Dimensioning
/
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions
(Drafting and Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Continuous Auto Dimensioning
/
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions
Menu
(Modeling, Drafting, and Sketch task environment)
4
Tools→Sketch Constraints→Continuous Auto
Dimensioning /
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions
Essentials for NX Designers
4-27
Sketching
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions
Use the Inferred Constraints and Dimensions command to control
which constraints or dimensions are automatically inferred during curve
construction.
You can set inferred constraints for geometric constraints, dimensional
constraints, and constraints recognized when using snap point options.
1. Perpendicular
4
2. Parallel
3. Coincident
Inferred constraints behave like normally applied geometric constraints
and can be seen and deleted using the Show/Remove Constraints dialog
or when you right-click an object and choose Remove All Constraints.
You can temporarily disable all of the infer constraint settings during
curve construction by pressing and holding the Alt key on Windows or
the Ctrl+Alt keys on non-Windows platforms.
Where do I find it?
Task environment Sketch
Toolbar
Menu
4-28
Essentials for NX Designers
Sketch Tools→Inferred Constraints
Tools→Constraints→Inferred Constraints
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions dialog box
Available constraints
4
Constraints recognized by Snap Point
Auto Dimensioning rules
Essentials for NX Designers
4-29
Sketching
Inferred Constraints and Dimensions dialog box
Dimensions Inferred while Sketching
Create Dimensions for Typed Values Creates a driving dimension for any
geometry created by typing a value in
an on-screen input box.
Auto Dimensioning Rules
The following are the rules for creating automatic dimensions. You can apply
these rules in any order.
Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions on Lines
4
Create Dimensions to Reference Axes
4-30
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Create Length Dimensions
4
Create Adjacent Angles
Creates angular dimensions between adjacent objects.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-31
Sketching
Create Symmetric Dimensions
Creates symmetric dimensions if there are any symmetric constraints or
mirrored curves. The dimensions will be created between these objects
across the symmetry line
4
The Snap Angle option
You can specify the snap angle on the Session Settings page of the Sketch
Preferences dialog box.
The Snap Angle option lets you specify the value of the default snap angle
tolerance for vertical, horizontal, parallel, and perpendicular lines.
The default snap angle is 3 degrees.
The snap angle must be greater then zero and less then 20 degrees.
Hold the Alt key to temporarily disable the snap action.
4-32
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Profile
Use the Profile command to create a series of connected lines and/or arcs
in string mode.
In string mode, the end of the last curve becomes the beginning of the next
curve.
For example, you can create this pipe vise profile in one series of mouse clicks:
4
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Profile
(Drafting and Sketch task environment) Sketch
Tools→Profile
Menu
(Modeling and Drafting) Insert→Sketch Curve→Profile
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Curve→Profile
Essentials for NX Designers
4-33
Sketching
Profile dialog bar
1) Object Type
Line
Creates a line.
This is the default mode when you choose Profile.
Points selected off of the sketch plane are projected
onto the sketch plane.
4
Arc
Creates an arc.
While stringing from line to arc, you create a two
point arc. You can create a three point arc if the
first object drawn in string mode is an arc.
By default, Profile switches to line mode after you
create an arc. To create a series of chained arcs,
double-click the Arc option.
2) Input Mode
Coordinate
Mode
Creates curve points using X and Y coordinate
values.
Parameter Mode
Creates curve points using parameters that are
appropriate to a line or arc curve type.
Lines: Length and Angle parameters.
Arcs: Radius and Sweep Angle parameters.
3) Sketch
Define Sketch
Plane
4-34
Essentials for NX Designers
Lets you define a sketch plane using standard plane
creation methods.
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Create Profile sketch curves
This is the general process for creating a series of connected lines and/or arcs
in the string mode using the command, Profile
.
1. In the graphics window, click once to establish a start point.
2. Move to the end of the desired line, and click once to establish the end
point.
3. To create an arc, click and drag anywhere in the graphics window to
switch from line creation to arc creation.
4. Move the cursor away from the line end through different quadrants of
the circle, without clicking, to establish the direction of the arc.
Perpendicular or tangential relationships change depending on the
quadrant through which you move away from the line end.
5. Click once to establish the end of the arc.
Line mode is automatically restored after an arc is created. To
create consecutive arcs, double-click the Arc button any time during
profile mode.
6. To stop the profile string mode, click the middle mouse button.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-35
4
Sketching
Create lines parallel or perpendicular to other lines
1. In the Inferred Constraints dialog box, make sure the parallel and
perpendicular constraints are on.
2. Define the line’s start point by entering parameters or click a location.
3. Pass your cursor over the target line for the constraint, then move your
cursor until you see the appropriate constraint.
A line can snap tangent to all types of curves or edges, including lines,
arcs, ellipses, conics and splines, if the Tangent constraint is on in Inferred
Constraints.
4
Create lines tangent to curves
1. In the Inferred Constraints dialog box, make sure the tangent constraint
is on.
2. Define the line’s start point by entering parameters or click a location.
3. Pass your cursor over the target curve for the constraint, then move your
cursor until you see the appropriate constraint.
A line can snap tangent to all types of curves or edges, including lines, arcs,
ellipses, conics and splines.
Create lines at angles
1. Lock a parallel, perpendicular, or collinear constraint to the original line.
2. In the on-screen input box, specify a relative angle.
Length
Relative Angle
23.855
45.0
The new direction displays with a second, dashed help line. The angle is
measured with respect to the previewed constraint line.
Positive angles are measured counterclockwise. Negative angles are
measured clockwise.
4-36
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketch Point
Use the Sketch Point command to create points in a sketch.
If you create a point off of the sketch plane, NX projects the point onto
the sketch plane.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Point
(Drafting and Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Point
Menu
(Modeling and Drafting) Insert→Sketch Curve→Point
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Datum/Point→Point
Essentials for NX Designers
4-37
4
Sketching
Activities: Sketching curves
In the Sketching section, do the activities:
•
Create a sketch profile
•
Use Continuous Auto Dimensioning
•
Add dimensional constraints
4
4-38
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketch curve functions
There are several options you can use to modify sketch curves:
Quick Trim
Trims curves to the closest physical or virtual
intersection.
Quick Extend
Extends curves to a physical or virtual intersection.
Make Corner
Creates a corner by extending and/or trimming two
input curves to a common intersection.
Fillet
Creates a fillet between two or three curves.
Chamfer
Bevels a sharp corner between two sketch lines.
Essentials for NX Designers
4
4-39
Sketching
Quick Trim
Use the Quick Trim command to trim a curve to the closest physical or virtual
intersection in either direction. You can:
•
Preview the trim by passing the cursor over the curve.
•
Select individual curves to trim.
•
Hold the left mouse button and drag across multiple curves to trim them
all at the same time.
4
Trimming a curve that has no intersection deletes the curve.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Quick Trim
(Drafting and Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Quick Trim
Menu
(Modeling and Drafting)
Edit→Sketch Curve→Quick Trim
(Sketch task environment) Edit→Curve→Quick Trim
4-40
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketching constraints and Quick Trim
When the Create Inferred Constraints
command is used, the appropriate
constraints are inferred after a trim operation.
Constraint
Concentric
Coincident
Point on Curve
Collinear
Equal Radius
Tangent
Trim Operation
An arc in the middle.
Intersecting lines to an intersection point.
A curve to a boundary curve.
A line in the middle
An arc in the middle.
A curve at the tangent point of a boundary curve.
4
Use Quick Trim
1. On the Direct Sketching toolbar, click Quick Trim
.
2. For the Curve to Trim, select either a single curve or use the drag path
method to select multiple curves.
The Curve to Trim will trim to the closest intersecting curve. If you
want to trim to a different curve select the Boundary Curve first.
3. Conditional: In the Settings group, select the Trim to Extension box if
you selected a boundary curve that will produce a theoretical intersection
with the Curve to Trim.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-41
Sketching
Quick Extend
Use the Quick Extend command to extend a curve to a physical or virtual
intersection with another curve. You can:
•
Preview the extension by passing the cursor over the curve.
•
Select individual curves to extend.
•
Hold the left mouse button and drag across multiple curves to extend
them all at the same time.
4
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Quick Extend
(Drafting and Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Quick Extend
Menu
(Modeling and Drafting)
Edit→Sketch Curve→Quick Extend
(Sketch task environment) Edit→Curve→Quick Extend
4-42
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Sketcher constraints and Quick Extend
When the Create Inferred Constraints
command is used, the appropriate
constraints after an extend operation are inferred.
Constraint
Extend Operation
Coincident
A curve to the endpoint of another curve.
Point on Curve A curve to a boundary curve.
Tangent
A curve to a tangent point of a boundary curve.
Use Quick Extend
1. On the Direct Sketch toolbar, click Quick Extend
.
4
2. For the Curve to Extend, select either a single curve or use the drag path
method to select multiple curves.
The Curve to Extend will extend to the closest intersecting curve. If
you want to extend to a different curve select the Boundary Curve
first.
3. Conditional: In the Settings group, select the Extend to Extension box if
you selected a boundary curve that will produce a theoretical intersection
with the Curve to Extend.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-43
Sketching
Make Corner
Use the Make Corner command to create a corner by extending and/or
trimming two input curves to a common intersection.
If the Create Inferred Constraints option is on, a coincident constraint is
created at the intersection.
4
You can also hold the left mouse button and drag over curves create a corner.
Make Corner works with:
•
Lines
•
Arcs
•
Open conics
•
Open splines (trimming only)
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Make Corner
(Drafting and Sketch task environment) Sketch
Tools→Make Corner
Menu
(Modeling and Drafting) Edit→Sketch Curve→Make
Corner
(Sketch task environment) Edit→Curve→Make Corner
4-44
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Fillet
Use the Fillet command to create a fillet between two or three curves. You can:
•
Trim all input curves or leave them untrimmed.
•
Delete the third curve of a three-curve fillet.
•
Specify a value for the fillet radius, or preview the fillet and determine its
size and location by moving the cursor.
•
Hold the left mouse button and drag over curves to create a fillet.
4
Fillet preview and final output
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Fillet
(Drafting and Sketch task environment) Sketch
Tools→Fillet
Menu
(Modeling and Drafting) Insert→Sketch Curve→Fillet
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Curve→Fillet
Essentials for NX Designers
4-45
Sketching
Chamfer
Use the Chamfer command to bevel a sharp corner between two sketch lines.
You can create the following chamfer types:
•
Symmetric
•
Asymmetric
•
Offset and Angle
You can also hold the left mouse button and drag over curves to create a
chamfer.
4
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Chamfer
(Drafting and Sketch task environment) Sketch
Tools→Chamfer
Menu
(Modeling and Drafting) Insert→Sketch
Curve→Chamfer
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Curve→Chamfer
4-46
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Activities: Chamfer, Fillet, Quick Trim, Quick Extend, Make Corner
In the Sketching section, do the activities:
•
Create chamfers and fillets
4
•
Trim and extend curves, and make corners
Essentials for NX Designers
4-47
Sketching
Types of constraints
Use constraints to precisely control the objects in a sketch and to convey the
design intent for a feature. There are two types of constraints, geometric
constraints and dimensional constraints.
Geometric Constraints
Specify and maintain geometric conditions for or between sketch geometry.
For example, geometric constraints can establish:
4
•
A line as vertical or horizontal.
•
Two lines as perpendicular or parallel to each other.
1. Tangent
2. Vertical
3. Horizontal
4. Offset
5. Perpendicular
6. Coincident
4-48
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Dimensions
Specify and maintain dimensions for or between sketch geometry.
Dimensional constraints are also called driving dimensions.
For example, dimensions can establish:
•
The size of a sketch object, such as the radius of an arc or length of a curve.
•
A relationship between two objects, such as the distance between two
points.
4
Dimensional constraints look the same as Drafting dimensions. However,
while Drafting dimensions are notations, dimensional constraints control the
size of sketch objects.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-49
Sketching
Degree-of-freedom arrows
Degree-of-freedom (DOF) arrows
mark points on a sketch that are free to
move. There are three types of degree-of-freedom: positional, rotational, and
radial. This example shows positional constraints:
1. This point is free to move in
the X direction only.
2. This point is free to move in
both the X and Y directions.
3. This point is free to move in
the Y direction only.
4
When you constrain a point from moving in a given direction, NX removes the
DOF arrow. Applying one constraint can remove several DOF arrows. When
all the arrows are gone, the sketch is fully constrained.
Fully constrain a sketch when you need complete control of the design. Note
that constraining a sketch is optional. You can use an under-constrained
sketch to define a feature.
4-50
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Overconstrained sketches
When a dimension or constraint is added that overconstrains a sketch, the
following Update Sketch message is displayed:
The sketch geometry is overconstrained after the last edit.
The constraints and dimensions that are related to the problem are
highlighted in the Overconstrained Objects color.
The curves that are not positioned correctly are shown in the Unsolved
Curves color.
When you select an overconstrained dimension the status line notifies you
that the dimension is overconstrained. When you place your cursor over
sketch objects a tool tip also notifies you of that the object is overconstrained.
4
1. Overconstrained dimension is
red.
2. Overconstrained constraint is
red.
3. Unsolved curve is gray.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-51
Sketching
Geometric Constraints
Use the Geometric Constraints command to add geometric constraints to
sketch geometry. These specify and maintain conditions for or between sketch
geometry. You must first select a constraint type and then select the objects
that you want to constrain. This workflow allows you to quickly create the
same constraint on multiple objects.
Constraints can:
4
•
Define a line as being horizontal or vertical.
•
Ensure that multiple lines remain parallel to each other.
•
Require that several arcs have the same radius.
•
Position your sketch in space or relative to outside objects.
1. Tangent
2. Vertical
3. Horizontal
4. Offset
5. Perpendicular
6. Coincident
When the Select Object to Constrain option is active, you can select multiple
objects.
In the Settings group, you can select the:
4-52
•
Automatic Selection Progression check box so that you do not need
to click the middle mouse button to advance to the Select Object to
Constrain to option.
•
Constraints that you want to display by default in the Constraints group.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Geometric Constraints
(Sketch task environment) Sketch Tools→Geometric
Constraints
(Modeling) Insert→Sketch Constraint→Geometric
Constraints
Menu
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Geometric
Constraints
4
Essentials for NX Designers
4-53
Sketching
Geometric Constraints dialog box
When you choose the Geometric Constraints command, NX displays a dialog
box. You must first select a constraint type and then select the objects that
you want to constrain. This workflow allows you to quickly create the same
constraint on multiple objects.
4
When the Select Object to Constrain option is active, you can select multiple
objects.
In the Settings group, you can select the:
•
Automatic Selection Progression check box so that you do not need to
click OK to advance to the Select Object to Constrain to option.
•
Constraints that you want to display by default in the Constraints group.
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling, Drafting, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal
(Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal) Direct
Sketch→Geometric Constraints
(Sketch task environment and Drafting) Sketch
Toolbar
Tools→Geometric Constraints
(Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, Drafting)
Insert→Sketch Constraint→Geometric Constraints
Menu
4-54
Essentials for NX Designers
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Sketch
Constraint→Geometric Constraints
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Geometric Constraints shortcut toolbar
You can create geometric constraints without selecting the Geometric
Constraints command. When you select curves, the shortcut toolbar will
display all the possible constraints for the selected curves.
4
You can delete geometric constraints without selecting the Show / Remove
Constraints command. When you select geometric constraint symbols, the
shortcut toolbar will display the Delete command.
You can also right-click objects and choose a command from the list.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-55
Sketching
Create geometric constraints using the shortcut toolbar
This example shows you how to add geometric constraints using the shortcut
toolbar.
4
1. Ensure that Display Sketch Constraints
is active.
2. Select the three lines as shown, and on the shortcut toolbar, click Vertical
.
To display the shortcut toolbar if you do not see it, right-click one of the
selected objects.
4-56
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
3. Select the three lines as shown, and on the shortcut toolbar, click
Horizontal
.
4
4. Click Finish Sketch
.
You cannot create geometric constraints to external objects in a sketch
that contains any positioning dimensions.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-57
Sketching
Geometric Constraints quick reference
The following table shows the essential geometric constraints. Not all
possible constraints are shown.
Constraint
Type
Command Icon in
icon
graphics
window
Fixed
Description
Defines fixed characteristics for geometry,
depending on the type of geometry as follows:
Point
Fixes the location.
Line
Fixes the angle.
4
Line, Arc or elliptical arc endpoint
Fixes the location of the endpoint.
Arc center, elliptical arc center, circle center,
or ellipse center
Fixes the location of the center.
Arc or circle
Fixes the radius and the location of the
center.
Elliptical arc or Ellipse
Fixes the radii and the location of the center.
Spline control point
Fixes the location of the control point.
Fully Fixed
Creates sufficient fixed constraints to
completely define the position and orientation
of sketch geometry in one step.
Coincident
Defines two or more points as having the same
location.
Concentric
Defines two or more circular and elliptical arcs
as having the same center
Collinear
Defines two or more lines as lying on or passing
through the same straight line.
4-58
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Point On
Curve
Defines the location of a point as lying on a
curve.
Point on
String
Defines the location of a point as lying on a
projected curve. You must select the point first,
then select the curve.
This is the only valid constraint that
should be applied to a projected curve.
Midpoint
Defines the location of a point as equidistant
from the two end points of a line or a circular
arc.
For the Midpoint constraint, select
the curve anywhere other than at its
endpoints.
Horizontal
Defines a line as horizontal.
Vertical
Defines a line as vertical.
Parallel
Defines two or more lines or ellipses as being
parallel to each other.
Perpendicular
Defines two lines or ellipses as being
perpendicular to each other.
Tangent
Defines two objects as being tangent to each
other.
Equal Length
Defines two or more lines as having the same
length.
Equal Radius
Defines two or more arcs as having the same
radius.
Constant
Length
Defines a line as having a constant length.
Constant
Angle
Defines a line as having a constant angle.
Mirror Curve
Defines two objects as being mirror images of
each other.
Make
Symmetric
Defines two objects as being symmetric with
each other.
Essentials for NX Designers
4
4-59
Sketching
Offset Curve
The Offset Curve command offsets a chain of
curves, projected curves, or curves/edges in the
current assembly, and constrains the geometry
using an Offset constraint.
4
4-60
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Display Sketch Constraints
Use the Display Sketch Constraints command to show all geometric
constraints applied to the sketch.
4
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling)
Direct Sketch→Display Sketch Constraints
(Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Display Sketch Constraints
Menu
(Modeling)
Tools→Sketch Constraints→Display Sketch
Constraints
(Sketch task environment)
Tools→Constraints→Display Sketch Constraints
Essentials for NX Designers
4-61
Sketching
Show / Remove Constraints
Use the Show / Remove Constraints command to display the geometric
constraints that are associated with sketch geometry. Use Show / Remove
Constraints to:
4
•
Remove specified geometric constraints.
•
List information about all geometric constraints.
•
Interrogate and resolve over-constrained or conflicting conditions.
•
Maintain design intent by checking for existing relationships to outside
features or objects.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling)
Direct Sketch→Show / Remove Constraints
(Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Show / Remove Constraints
Menu
(Modeling) Tools→Sketch Constraints→Show /
Remove Constraints
(Sketch task environment)
Tools→Constraints→Show / Remove Constraints
4-62
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Show / Remove Constraints dialog box
Options
List Constraints for
Controls which constraints are listed in the Show Constraints
list window.
Selected Object - Lets you display constraints for the object
selected.
Selected Objects - Lets you display constraints for multiple
objects.
Constraint Type
Include or Exclude
Show Constraints
All in Active Sketch - Shows all of the constraints in the active
sketch. This is the default setting.
Lets you filter constraints by type.
Determines whether the specified Constraint Type is the only
type displayed in the list box (Include, which is the default)
or the only type not displayed (Exclude).
Lets you control the display of constraints in the list window.
Options are:
Explicit - Displays all constraints created explicitly or
implicitly by the user, including all non-inferred coincident
constraints, but excluding all inferred coincident constraints
created by the system during curve creation.
Inferred - Displays all inferred coincident constraints that are
automatically created by the system during curve creation.
Both - Displays both Explicit and Inferred types of constraints.
Remove Highlighted
Remove Listed
Information
Show Constraints list window - Lists the geometric
constraints of the selected sketch geometry. The list is subject
to the Explicit, Inferred or Both setting.
Lets you remove one or more constraints by selecting them in
the constraints list window and then choosing this option.
Removes all of the listed constraints displayed in the Show
Constraints list window.
Displays information about all geometric constraints in the
active sketch in the Information window. This option is useful
if you want to save or print out the constraint information.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-63
4
Sketching
Activities: Sketch Constraints
In the Sketching section, do these activities:
•
Create geometric constraints
•
Add geometric constraints
4
4-64
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
•
Solve an over-constrained sketch condition
4
Essentials for NX Designers
4-65
Sketching
Sketch dimensions
Use sketch dimensions to establish the following:
•
Size of a sketch object.
•
Relationship between two objects in a sketch.
•
Relationship between two sketches.
•
Relationship between a sketch and another feature.
Sketch dimensions are displayed like drafting dimensions: they have
dimension text, extension lines, and arrows. However, sketch dimensions
differ from drafting dimensions because you can change the dimension value.
This lets you control a feature derived from a sketch. Sketch dimensions also
create an expression you can edit in the Expressions dialog box.
4
Perpendicular, Horizontal, Vertical, and Angular dimensions maintain their
direction when the expression value is set to zero. You can also enter negative
values for these dimension types to achieve the same results as using the
Alternate Solution command.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal)
Direct Sketch→Inferred Dimensions
( Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Inferred Dimensions
4-66
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Menu
(Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal)
Insert→Sketch Constraint→Dimension→Inferred
Dimensions
(Sketch task environment)
Insert→Dimensions→Inferred Dimensions
4
Essentials for NX Designers
4-67
Sketching
Sketch dimension types
Sketch Dimension types
Infers a dimension type, based on the cursor position
Inferred
and the object(s) selected.
Creates a distance constraint parallel to the XC axis
Horizontal
between two points.
Creates a distance constraint parallel to the YC axis
Vertical
between two points.
4
4-68
Parallel
Creates a distance constraint between two points.
Perpendicular
Creates a perpendicular distance constraint from a
line to a point.
Diameter
Creates a diameter constraint for an arc or circle.
Radius
Creates a radius constraint for an arc or circle.
Angular
Dimensions an angle.
Perimeter
Creates a dimensions for the collected length of
selected curves.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Inferred Dimensions
Use the Inferred Dimensions command to create a dimensional constraint.
NX infers the dimension type based on the objects you select and the location
of the cursor.
4
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling)
Direct Sketch→Inferred Dimensions
( Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Inferred Dimensions
Menu
(Modeling) Insert→Sketch
Constraint→Dimension→Inferred Dimensions
(Sketch task environment)
Insert→Dimensions→Inferred Dimensions
Essentials for NX Designers
4-69
Sketching
Create Inferred Dimensions
1. Optional: Set your annotation preferences.
2. On the Sketch Tools toolbar, click Inferred Dimensions
.
3. In the graphics window, select the sketch object(s) you want to dimension.
4. Drag the dimension preview and click to place it on the sketch.
5. Click Inferred Constraints or the middle mouse button to exit the
command.
Inferred Dimensions allow for the creation of many different kinds
of dimensions.
4
You can also create specific dimension types by selecting the dimension
type from the Inferred Dimensions list.
In the following example, you can dynamically edit the expression name
and value in the on-screen input box.
4-70
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Edit sketch dimensions
Use this procedure to edit a sketch dimension using the on-screen input box.
1. In the graphics window, double-click the dimension.
You can also right-click over a dimension and choose Edit Value.
2. Edit the name or value in the on-screen input box.
To edit a formula value, click Launch the formula editor
.
3. Press Enter.
To use the Dimensions dialog box options, on the
Dimensions dialog bar, click Sketch Dimensions Dialog
4
.
To edit the dimension position, drag the dimension.
In the following example you can edit either the name of the sketch
dimension, a constant value, or a formula.
The name and value of a dimension may also be edited by using the
Expressions dialog box. As dimensions are edited, the constraints are
evaluated and the geometry is modified.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-71
Sketching
Dimensions dialog bar
When you select a dimension command from the Dimensions Drop-down
, the Dimensions dialog bar appears.
4
Dimensions
Opens the Dimensions dialog box.
Create Reference
Direction
Activate this option to create reference
dimensions. NX remembers the setting during
the current session and applies it to subsequent
dimensions you create.
This option is only available while the dimension
is being previewed.
You can also right-click and choose
Reference.
Create Alternate
Angle
Activate this option when you want NX to
calculate the maximum dimension between
sketch curves.
The figure below shows the same dimension
with this option off (left) and on (right):
This option is only available while the angle
dimension is being previewed.
You can also right-click and choose
Alternate Angle.
4-72
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Dimensions dialog box
When Dimensions
is selected from the Dimensions dialog bar, the
Dimensions dialog box opens.
1. Lets you specify commands for
creating inferred or explicit
dimensions.
2. Lists the names and values of all
dimensions in the current sketch.
3.
Lets you delete the selected
dimension.
4. Lets you edit the name and value
of a selected dimension.
5. Lets you change the value of the
selected dimensional constraint by
dragging the slider.
6. Lets you specify how NX places
dimensions.
7. Maintains the text of dimensions
at a constant size when you zoom
a sketch in or out.
Essentials for NX Designers
4-73
4
Sketching
Convert To/From Reference
Use the Convert To/From Reference command to convert sketch curves from
active to reference, or dimensions from driving to reference.
Downstream commands do not use reference curves and reference dimensions
do not control sketch geometry.
By default NX displays reference curves in Phantom line font:
1. Active curves
4
2. Reference curve
3. Reference dimension
4. Driving dimensions
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling)
Direct Sketch→Convert To/From Reference
(Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Convert To/From Reference
Menu
Shortcut Menu
(Modeling) Tools→Sketch Constraints→Convert
To/From Reference
(Sketch task environment)
Tools→Constraints→Convert To/From Reference
Right-click a dimension →Convert to Reference or
Convert to Driving
Right-click a curve →Convert to Reference or Convert
to Active
4-74
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Activities: Create constraints
In the Sketching section, do the activities:
•
Fully constrain a profile
4
•
Edit and constrain a u-shaped sketch
•
Sketch in context of an assembly
Essentials for NX Designers
4-75
Sketching
Projects: Simple Sketching
In the Projects section, there are three sketching projects.
Tier 1
Pulley - part 1
4
Tier 2
Flywheel - part 1
Tank - part 1
These are the beginning sketches for components that will make up the
compressor project.
4-76
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Sketching
Summary: Sketching
This lesson introduced the concept of creating a sketch.
Sketches may be used to define a base feature, guide paths, and additional
associative features to the base feature.
A sketch parametrically controls curves.
Constraints are applied to sketch objects in order to capture the design intent.
In this lesson you:
•
Created sketches directly in Modeling, on solid faces, and a Datum CSYS.
•
Manipulated the visibility of sketches using the Show/Hide commands
from the Part Navigator.
•
Created and edited curves in a sketch.
•
Created inferred and explicit geometric constraints.
•
Created and edited dimensional constraints.
Essentials for NX Designers
4
4-77
4
Lesson
5
Expressions
Purpose
This lesson introduces expressions which define characteristics of features.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create expressions.
•
Edit expressions.
5
Essentials for NX Designers
5-1
Expressions
Expressions overview
Expressions are arithmetic or conditional formulas that define the
characteristics of features.
Software expressions are automatically created when you:
•
Create a feature.
•
Dimension a sketch.
•
Position a feature.
•
Constrain an assembly.
All expressions have a unique name and a formula that can contain a
combination of variables, functions, numbers, operators, and symbols.
Expression names are variables that you can insert in the formula strings
of other expressions. This can be used to break up lengthy formulas and to
define relationships that can be used in place of numbers.
5
Where do I find it?
Menu
Part Navigator
Tools→Expression
In the Main panel or Details panel, right-click an
expression and choose Edit in Expression Editor
From supported Modeling dialogs, click parameter
entry options and choose Formula.
Dialog boxes
5-2
Essentials for NX Designers
In supported dialog boxes, click
and choose Formula
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Expressions
Expression examples
Here are some examples of expressions, their formulas and their resulting
values:
Expression Name
length
Formula
5*width
p39 (Extrude(6) End Limit)
p1+p2*(2+p8*sin(p3))
118
p26 (Simple Hole(9) Tip Angle)
Value
20
18.849555921
118
Expressions case sensitivity
Expression names are not case sensitive, with the following exceptions:
•
•
Expression names are case sensitive if their dimensionality is set to
Constant.
Expression names are case sensitive if they were created before NX 3.
When expression names are case sensitive, the name must be spelled exactly
when used in other expressions.
Essentials for NX Designers
5-3
5
Expressions
Expressions dialog box
(1) Listed
Expressions
(2) Expression list
Choose from:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
User Defined
Named
Filter by Name
Filter by Value
Filter by Formula
Filter by String
Filter by Comment
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Filter by Expression
Type
Filter by Feature Type
Unused Expressions
Object Parameters
Measurements
Attribute Expressions
All
Columns for Name (followed by usage in the part),
Formula, Value, Units, Type, Comment, and Checks
(3) Accept Edit
(4) Reject Edit
(5) Less Options
5
5-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Expressions
Creating expressions
•
Software generated expressions are created for you automatically when
you create features and dimension sketches. They have the format p#,
where # represents a series of whole numbers.
•
Enter user defined expressions in an on-screen input box as the name and
formula, separated by the equal symbol, for example Rad=5.00.
•
In the Expressions dialog box, enter an expression name in the Name box
and the corresponding formula in the Formula box.
After you type the name of the expression, you may press the Tab, equal
sign, or Enter key to advance the cursor to the Formula box, or just
click in the Formula box.
Create a numerical expression
1. Choose Tools→Expression.
5
2. In the Name box, type the name of the expression and press Enter.
3. (Optional) Change the default values in the Dimensionality and Units
lists.
4. In the Formula box, type the formula for the expression and press Enter.
5. Click Apply or OK to save expression changes.
Essentials for NX Designers
5-5
Expressions
Edit an expression
1. Choose Tools→Expression.
2. Select an expression to modify from the list.
3. Modify the Name, Formula, Dimensionality, or Units of the expression.
For software generated expressions, Dimensionality and Units are
not available for editing.
4. Press Enter or Accept Edit
.
5. Click Apply or OK to save the expression.
When you edit the name of an expression, NX automatically updates
the formula of any expression that references it.
5
5-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Expressions
Listing expressions associated with features
If Listed Expressions is set to All, all of the expressions in the part are listed.
If Listed Expressions is set to Object Parameters, and a feature is selected,
only the expressions associated with the selected feature are listed.
If an expression defines a feature, the feature name is listed with it. For
example, p8 (Simple Hole(5) Diameter)
You can list all of the expressions associated with a feature in an Information
window:
•
Choose Information→Feature and select the feature.
•
Over a feature node in the Part Navigator, choose Information from the
shortcut menu.
List References
The List References command shows you if an expression is referenced in
another expression and what feature(s) use the expression.
5
Over a listed expression, from the shortcut menu, choose List References.
Essentials for NX Designers
5-7
Expressions
Insert Name
The Insert Name option places the name of a selected expression into a
formula you are editing.
Over a listed expression, from the shortcut menu, choose Insert Name.
Bold type on an option in the shortcut menu for an object, Insert Name
for an expression name, for example, means that the option in bold type
is preformed when you double-click the object.
When you are editing a formula, you can double-click a listed expression
to insert its name.
5
Parameter entry options
Access the Expressions dialog box as you create features by choosing
Formula from the parameter entry option menu.
You can specify a formula for the expression referenced by a feature
parameter.
Parameter entry options are available with most text input boxes.
5-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Expressions
Expression options
Expression options that might be useful to you include:
Functions
Measure Distance
Delete
Insert a math or engineering function
into your expression.
Measure the minimum distance between
any two NX objects.
Remove a selected user-defined
expression.
You cannot delete an expression that is in use by a feature, sketch, assembly
constraint, etc.
Other options that appear in the Expressions dialog box are described
in the online Help, or in the course Intermediate NX Design and
Assemblies.
5
Essentials for NX Designers
5-9
Expressions
Activities: Expressions
In the Expressions section, do the activity:
•
Create and edit expressions
5
5-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Expressions
Summary: Expressions
Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic formulas that define the
characteristics of features.
In this lesson you:
•
Created expressions.
•
Edited expressions.
5
Essentials for NX Designers
5-11
5
Lesson
6
Datum features
Purpose
This lesson introduces the datum plane, datum axis, and datum CSYS
reference features.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create a datum plane.
•
Create a datum axis.
•
Use datum features to position other features.
•
Create a datum CSYS.
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-1
Datum features
Datum Plane
Use the Datum Plane command to create a planar reference feature to help
define other features, such as swept bodies and features at angles to the
faces of target solids.
Datum planes can be associative or non-associative.
Associative datum planes
Associative datum planes reference curves, faces, edges, points, and other
datums. You can create associative datum planes across multiple bodies.
6
Associative datum planes are listed in the Part Navigator as Datum Plane
entries.
Non-associative datum planes
Non-associative datum planes do not reference other geometry. Use any
of the datum plane methods to create non-associative datum planes by
clearing the Associative box in the Datum Plane dialog box.
Non-associative datum planes are listed in the Part Navigator as Fixed
Datum Plane entries.
Where do I find it?
6-2
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Shortcut menu
Feature→Datum/Point Drop-down→Datum Plane
Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane
Right-click a planar face→Datum Plane
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
Datum plane types
Select a plane type from the Type option list. Some of the most used options
are listed below.
You can right-click the sizing handles, direction arrows, and points to
choose many of the following options from the shortcut list.
When you edit a datum plane, you can change its type, defining objects,
and associative status.
Inferred — Determines the best datum plane type to use based on
objects you select.
At Angle — Creates a plane at a specified angle from a selected
planar object.
At Distance — Creates a plane parallel to a planar face or another
datum plane at a distance you specify.
Bisector — Creates a plane midway between two selected planar
faces or planes. If the input planes are at an angle to each other, the
plane is placed at the bisected angle.
6
Curves and Points — Creates a plane using various combinations of
points, a line, a planar edge, a datum axis, or a planar face (for example,
three points, a point and a curve, etc.).
Two Lines — Creates a plane using a combination of any two linear
curves, linear edges, or datum axes.
Tangent — Creates a datum plane tangent to a non-planar surface,
relative to a second selected object.
Point and Direction — Creates a plane from a point and a specified
direction.
On Curve — Creates a plane at a location on a curve or edge.
Essentials for NX Designers
6-3
Datum features
Datum plane options
Alternate Solution
When there is more than one possible solution for creating the datum
plane using the current parameters, the Alternate Solution option is
available.
When you click or press the Page Down or Page Up keys, the other
possible solutions for creating a plane are displayed.
Reverse Direction – Plane Orientation group
Reverses the direction of the plane normal. The plane preview always
displays an arrow from its center that points in the direction of the plane
normal.
6
Offset
When the check box is selected, it creates a datum plane offset from the
defined plane, in the direction and at the distance you specify.
Distance
Available when the Offset check box is selected and a base plane has
been defined.
Enter the value, or drag the handle to the desired offset distance.
Reverse Direction – Offset group
Available when the Offset check box is selected and a base plane has
been defined.
This reverses the offset direction.
6-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
Associative
When the check box is selected, the datum plane created is an associative
feature that appears in the Part Navigator with the name Datum Plane.
When the Associative check box is cleared, the datum plane is created
as a Fixed datum plane, and appears in the Part Navigator as a
non-associative Fixed Datum Plane.
When you edit a datum plane, you can change a fixed datum plane to a
relative plane by changing the Type, redefining its parent geometry, and
selecting the Associative check box.
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-5
Datum features
Applications for datum planes
Datum planes can be used to:
•
Define a sketch plane.
•
Serve as the planar placement face for the creation of features with
predefined shapes.
•
Serve as the target edge for positioning features such as holes.
•
Serve as the mirror plane when using the Mirror Feature command.
•
Define the start or end limits when creating extruded and revolved
features.
•
Trim a body.
•
Define positioning constraints in assemblies.
•
Help define a relative datum axis.
6
6-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
Create a datum plane using offset
This example shows how to create a datum plane that is offset from an
inferred plane using two lines.
1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select
Datum Plane.
Or choose Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane.
2. In the Datum Plane dialog box, make sure Type is set to Inferred
.
3. Select the first linear edge to define the plane.
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-7
Datum features
4. Select the second linear edge to define the plane.
5. In the Offset group, select the Offset check box.
6
Verify the direction of the desired offset. Click Reverse Direction
if necessary.
6. Drag the direction arrow the desired value of the offset, or enter it in the
offset Distance box.
6-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
7. Choose another command or click Apply.
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-9
Datum features
Create a datum plane midway between planar faces
The following example shows how to create a datum plane that bisects the
angle formed by two planar faces.
1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list,
selectDatum Plane.
Or choose Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plan.
2. In the Datum Plane dialog box, make sure Type is set to Inferred
or Bisector
.
If you have difficulty using the Inferred type, use the more explicit
Bisector type.
6
3. Select the front planar face.
4. Click the middle mouse button to advance to the next step.
6-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
5. Select the top planar face.
6. Optional: In the Plane Orientation group, click Alternate Solution to get a
different solution to the selections made.
In this example, Alternate Solution was clicked once.
6
7. Choose another command or click Apply.
Essentials for NX Designers
6-11
Datum features
Create a datum plane at an angle
The following example shows how to create a datum plane at an angle of
115 degrees from a reference plane.
1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list,
selectDatum Plane.
Or choose Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plan.
2. In the Datum Plane dialog box, make sure Type is set to Inferred
or At Angle
.
If you have difficulty using the Inferred type, use the more explicit
At Angle type.
6
3. Select the front angled face.
6-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
4. Select the top right linear edge of the part.
5. From the Angle Option list, select Value.
6. Drag the angle handle until the value shows 115 degrees.
6
7. Choose another command or click Apply.
Essentials for NX Designers
6-13
Datum features
Create a datum plane through three points
The following example shows how to create a datum plane that contains
three specified points.
1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list,
selectDatum Plane.
Or choose Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plan.
2. In the Datum Plane dialog box, make sure Type is set to Inferred
or Curves and Points
If you have difficulty using the Inferred type, use the more explicit
Curves and Points type.
6
3. If you are using the Inferred type, go to the next step.
If you are using theCurves and Points type, in the Curves and Points
Subtype group, from the Subtype list, select Three Points.
4. This example will use two arc centers and one end point.
Specify the first point.
Select the arc center in the top face.
6-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
5. Specify the second point.
Select the arc center on the bottom inside face.
6. Specify the third point.
Select an End Point on the bottom surface.
6
7. Choose another command or click Apply.
Essentials for NX Designers
6-15
Datum features
Activities: Datum features — Support design intent
In the Datum features section, do the activity:
•
Create datum planes to support design intent
6
6-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
Datum Axis
Use the Datum Axis command to define linear reference objects to help you
create other objects, such as datum planes, revolved features, extruded
features, and circular arrays.
Datum axes can be associative or non-associative.
Associative datum axes
Associative datum axes reference curves, faces, edges, points, and other
datums. You can create relative datum axes across multiple bodies.
Associative datum axes are listed in the Part Navigator as Datum Axis
entries.
Non-associative datum axes
Non-associative datum axes do not reference other geometry. Use any
of the datum axis methods to create fixed datum axes by clearing the
Associative box in the Datum Axis dialog box.
Non-associative datum axes are listed in the Part Navigator as Fixed
Datum Axis entries.
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Graphics window
Feature→Datum/Point Drop-down→Datum Axis
Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis
Right-click an object and choose Datum Axis
Essentials for NX Designers
6-17
6
Datum features
Datum axis types
Select an axis type from the Type option list.
When you edit a datum axis, you can change its type, defining objects, and
associative status.
Inferred — Determines the best datum axis type to use based on
objects you select.
XC–Axis — Creates a fixed datum axis on the XC-axis of the Work
Coordinate System (WCS).
YC–Axis — Creates a fixed datum axis on the YC-axis of the WCS.
ZC–Axis — Creates a fixed datum axis on the ZC-axis of the WCS.
Point and Direction — Creates a datum axis from a specified point
in a specified direction.
Two Points — Creates a datum axis by defining two points through
which the axis passes.
6
On Curve Vector — Creates a datum axis tangent, normal, or
binormal to a point on a curve or edge, or perpendicular or parallel to
another object.
Intersection — Creates a datum axis at the intersection of two
planar faces, datum planes, or planes.
Curve/Face Axis — Creates a datum axis on a linear curve or edge,
or the axis of a cylindrical or conical face or torus.
Fixed — Available only when editing a datum axis.
Any datum axis created using the YC-Axis, XC-Axis, or ZC-Axis, or any
of the other relative types used with the Associative check box cleared,
appear as the Fixed type during an edit.
6-18
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
Datum axis options
Reverse Direction – Cycle through the possible directions for the
axis normal.
Associative – Clear this check box to create a fixed datum axis. 1
Applications for datum axes
Datum axes can be used to:
•
Define an axis of rotation for revolved features.
•
Define an axis of rotation for circular arrays.
•
Define an associative datum plane.
•
Provide a directional reference.
•
Serve as a target for feature positioning dimensions.
6
1. In the Part Navigator, an associative datum plane has the name Datum Axis, while a non-associative datum plane has the name
Fixed Datum Axis.
Essentials for NX Designers
6-19
Datum features
Create a datum axis through two points
1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select
Datum Axis
.
Or choose Insert→ Datum/Point→ Datum Axis.
2. In the Datum Axis dialog box, make sure Type is set to Inferred
Two Points
or
.
If you have difficulty using the Inferred type, use the more explicit
Two Points type.
3. Set the snap point options as desired.
6
4. Specify the first point.
6-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
5. Specify the second point.
6
6. Click OK.
Essentials for NX Designers
6-21
Datum features
Create a datum axis at an intersection
This example shows how to create a datum axis at the intersection of two
planar faces.
1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select
Datum Axis
.
Or choose Insert→ Datum/Point→ Datum Axis.
2. In the Datum Axis dialog box, make sure Type is set to Inferred
Intersection
or
.
If you have difficulty using the Inferred type, use the more explicit
Intersection type.
6
3. Select the first planar face.
4. Select the second planar face.
6-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
5. Click OK or Apply.
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-23
Datum features
Create a datum axis from a point and a direction
This example shows how to create a datum axis located at a specified position
and in a specified direction.
1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select
Datum Axis
.
Or choose Insert→ Datum/Point→ Datum Axis.
2. In the Datum Axis dialog box, make sure Type is set to Inferred
Point and Direction
or
.
If you have difficulty using the Inferred type, use the more explicit
Point and Direction type.
6
3. Specify the location for the origin of the datum axis.
For this example, the arc center is selected as the origin of the datum axis.
4. If you are using the Inferred type, go to the next step.
If you are using the Point and Direction type, in the Direction group, from
the Orientation list, select Parallel to Vector.
6-24
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
5. Select an object to specify the direction vector.
For this example, the linear edge is selected.
6. Click OK or Apply.
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-25
Datum features
Create a datum axis on an edge and normal to a face
This example shows how to create a datum axis on an edge and that is
normal to a face.
1. On the Feature toolbar, from the Datum/Point Drop-down list, select
Datum Axis
.
Or choose Insert→ Datum/Point→ Datum Axis.
2. In the Datum Axis dialog box, make sure Type is set to Inferred
On Curve Vector
or
.
If you have difficulty using the Inferred type, use the more explicit
On Curve Vector type.
6
3. Select the first object you want to use to define the datum axis.
4. If you are using the Inferred type, go to the next step.
If you are using theOn Curve Vector type, in the Orientation on Curve
group, from the Orientation list, select Perpendicular to Object.
5. Select a face.
6. If your selections allow it, you can use Alternate Solution
different orientation.
6-26
Essentials for NX Designers
to define a
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
7. Click OK or Apply.
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-27
Datum features
Datum CSYS
Use Datum CSYS to quickly create a coordinate system consisting of a set of
reference objects. You can use the reference objects to associatively define the
position and orientation of other features.
An existing datum CSYS at the absolute coordinate system origin is included
in many of the default part templates.
A datum CSYS consists of the following reference objects:
•
•
•
•
A coordinate system
An origin point
Three datum planes
Three datum axes
You can create a datum CSYS:
6
•
At a fixed location relative to the work or absolute coordinate systems.
•
Associated to existing geometry.
•
Offset from an existing datum CSYS.
Uses for reference objects in a datum CSYS
Define:
6-28
•
Placement faces, constraints, and position of sketches and features.
•
Vector directions for features.
•
Critical product locations in model space and control them with
translation and rotation parameters.
•
Constraints to position parts in an assembly.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Feature→Datum/Point Drop-down→Datum CSYS
Insert→Datum/Point→Datum CSYS
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-29
Datum features
Activities: Datum features — cylindrical faces and other datums
In the Datum features section, do the activities:
•
Create datums on cylindrical faces
•
Create an offset datum CSYS
6
6-30
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Datum features
Summary: Datum features
Datums are reference features that you use to help construct other features
and sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement faces
do not exist.
In this lesson you:
•
Created associative datum planes and datum axes.
•
Used datum features to help position other features.
•
Edited datum planes to see how associative features are affected.
•
Created an associative datum CSYS.
6
Essentials for NX Designers
6-31
6
Lesson
7
Swept features
Purpose
This lesson introduces swept features that use a section string to define
a solid or sheet body.
Objectives
•
Create an Extrude feature.
•
Create a Revolve feature.
•
Create a Sweep Along Guide feature.
•
Combine bodies using a Boolean operation.
7
Essentials for NX Designers
7-1
Swept features
Types of swept features
You create swept features by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section
string. The section string may be composed of explicit curves, sketch curves,
edges, or faces.
Extrude – Sweep a section string (1) in a linear direction for a specified
distance.
Revolve – Rotate a section string (1) around a specified axis (2).
Sweep Along Guide – Sweep a section string (1) along a guide string (2).
Swept bodies are associative with both the section string and the guide string.
7
7-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Selection Intent - Curve Rule
The Selection bar has rules you can set up when selecting curves for sweep
operations.
1. Curve Rule options
2. Curve Rule modifiers
Use these rules to help you to select curves or edges:
•
In fewer steps than selecting them individually.
•
When only part of some curves is needed.
•
When a rule can determine which branch to take at multi-curve
intersections.
•
When future model development or edits may change the number of
curves in the profile.
7
Essentials for NX Designers
7-3
Swept features
Curve Rule options
Single Curve
Individually select one or more curves or edges with
no rule.
Connected
Curves
Select a chain of curves or edges that share endpoints.
Tangent Curves
Select a tangent chain of curves or edges.
This rule does not grow or shrink the chain if curves
are added or no longer form a single chain after an
edit to the model.
No rule is applied if the chained curves are
non-associative.
Non-associative curves that are no longer tangent
after an edit are not discarded.
Feature Curves
Collect all output curves from curve features, such as
sketches or any other curve features.
Face Edges
Collect all edges of the face containing the edge you
select.
When you select an edge, the cursor location
determines which face is selected.
7
Sheet Edges
Collect all edges of the sheet body you select.
Region
Boundary
Curves
Select a profile that encloses an area with a single
mouse click.
Curves in Group
Selects all curves that are members of a selected
group.
Infer Curves
Use the default intent method for the type of object
you select.
For example, with Extrude the default is Feature
Curves if you select a curve, and Single if you select
an edge.
7-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Changing selection intent rules
If you want to change the rule in effect after the initial object selection, you
can right-click over the object and select a different rule from the menu.
7
Essentials for NX Designers
7-5
Swept features
Curve collection modifiers
Stop at
Intersection
Specify that auto chaining stops on
intersection points of wireframe.
Follow Fillet
Automatically follow and leave fillets or
circular curves during section building.
Chain within
Feature
Limit the chaining to collect curves only
from the parent feature of the selected
curve.
Path Selection
Define a continuous path in a complex
network of curves and edges with a minimal
number of selections.
Path Selection is available for all commands
that are section-based.
7
7-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Internal and external sketches
Sketches that you create from within NX commands like Variational Sweep,
Extrude, or Revolve are internal sketches. The owning feature manages
access to, and the display of, internal sketches. Use internal sketches when
you want to associate the sketch with only one feature.
The sketch is only made visible when the owning feature, in this case
a Revolved feature, is activated.
Sketches that you create independently using the Sketch command are
external sketches, and are visible and accessible from anywhere within a
part. Use an external sketch to keep the sketch visible and to use it in more
than one feature or as reference for other sketches.
Differences between internal and external sketches
•
Internal sketches are visible in the graphics window only when you edit
the owning feature.
•
You cannot open an internal sketch directly from the Sketch task
environment unless you first make the sketch an external feature.
•
You can view external sketches in the graphics window and open them for
editing without first opening the owning feature.
Essentials for NX Designers
7
7-7
Swept features
Internal and external sketch status change
Use this procedure to change the status of a sketch from internal to external
and vise versa.
To change the status of a sketch from the Part Navigator.
•
Right-click the owning feature and choose Make Sketch External.
•
Right-click the owning feature and choose Make Sketch Internal.
The sketch is placed before its former owner in timestamp order.
In the following navigator view, the external sketch is the fourth
feature in the list, SKETCH_VS, and the owning feature, Variational
Sweep, is fifth.
To reverse this operation, right-click the owning feature and choose Make
Sketch Internal.
When you internalize the sketch, it no longer appears in the Part Navigator.
Note that the Variational Sweep is now the fourth feature.
7
7-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Extrude
Use the Extrude command to create a solid or sheet body by selecting a
section of curves, edges, faces, sketches, or curve features and extending
them a linear distance.
The following example shows how Extrude can form a solid body from a
section of curves.
You can:
•
Size an extrude feature by dragging distance handles or specifying
distance values.
•
Unite, subtract or intersect an extrude feature with existing bodies.
•
Produce multiple sheet or solid bodies with a single extrude feature.
•
Trim an extrude feature using faces, datum planes or solid bodies.
•
Add drafts to an extrude feature.
•
Add offsets to an extrude feature, measured from its base section.
7
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Shortcut menu
Feature→Extrude
Insert→Design Feature→Extrude
Right-click sketch→Extrude
Essentials for NX Designers
7-9
Swept features
Extrude start and end distances
To specify the start and end distances of an extrude feature:
•
•
•
Use drag handles (1).
Specify values in on-screen input boxes (2).
Specify values in dialog boxes (3).
7
7-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Create a simple extruded feature
1. Click Extrude
2. Select a sketch, curves, or edges for the section.
Selection Intent is available.
The default direction of the extrude is normal to the plane of the section.
3. Specify Start and End limits by using the drag handles in the graphics
window or typing distance values.
4. Select a Boolean type.
To create a new solid body, select None.
To combine the feature with an existing solid body, select one of the other
Boolean types.
5. Click Apply or OK to create the extrude feature.
7
Essentials for NX Designers
7-11
Swept features
Combine bodies using Boolean commands
Use Boolean commands to combine solid bodies or sheet bodies.
•
Unite – Combines the volume of two or more solid bodies into a
single body.
The target and tools must overlap or share faces so that the result is a
valid solid body.
•
Subtract – Removes the volume or area of one or more tool bodies
from a target body.
The target and tools can be solid bodies or sheet bodies.
•
Intersect – Creates a body containing the shared volume or area
between a target body and one or more tool bodies.
You can intersect solids with solids, sheets with sheets, and sheets with
solids. If you intersect a sheet and a solid, the sheet body must be the
target.
Target and tool
When you use a Boolean command, you identify a target body and one or
more tool bodies.
•
The target body is modified by the tool bodies.
•
You can save unmodified copies of the target and tool bodies.
7
Where do I find it?
7-12
Application
Modeling
Feature→Combine Drop-down list→Unite
Toolbar
Menu
Location in dialog
box
/Subtract
/Intersect
Insert→Combine→Unite/Subtract/Intersect
Boolean group in some dialog boxes to combine features
with an existing body as you create them.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Extrude – Inferred Boolean
The Extrude command automatically infers the Boolean operation that you
may want to apply. Inferred is the default Boolean option.
•
The inferred Boolean operation is based on the extrude direction and
section normal. The tool body must touch or intersect the target body
for a Boolean to be inferred.
Case 1
Direction is away from target; most
logical inferred Boolean is Unite.
Inferred Boolean = Unite
Status Line: Boolean will be a
Unite
Case 2
Direction is into target; most logical
inferred Boolean is Subtract.
Inferred Boolean = Subtract
Status Line: Boolean will be a
Subtract
7
Case 3
No possible Boolean; none inferred.
Inferred Boolean = none
Status Line: No Boolean will be
performed
Essentials for NX Designers
7-13
Swept features
•
•
The Inferred option is available in the Boolean group of the Extrude
dialog box and is the default.
o
If the inferred Boolean operation is not suitable, you must directly
select a feasible Boolean operation.
o
After you specify a Boolean type, that type becomes the default
Boolean operation the next time you use Extrude.
o
When an Extrude feature is edited, the actual Boolean used (even if
inferred) will appear in the Extrude dialog box instead of Inferred.
When possible, the Extrude command will also infer a target body. You
can change this inferred target by selecting a different target.
7
7-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Body type
You can use the Extrude and Revolve commands to create a solid body (1) or
a sheet body (2).
You create a solid body when you specify:
•
•
•
a closed section with the Body Type option set to Solid.
an open section with an offset.
an open section and revolve a total angle of 360°.
You create a sheet body when you specify:
•
•
a closed section with the Body Type option set to Sheet.
an open section with no offset. For revolve, the total angle must be less
than 360°.
Use the Open Profile Smart Volume option to enclose a tool volume that
intersects surrounding geometry.
7
The open profile volume will update with any changes to the intersecting
geometry.
Essentials for NX Designers
7-15
Swept features
Revolve
Use this command to create a round or partially round feature by rotating
section curves around an axis.
The following graphic shows a section
0 to 180 degrees.
rotated around an axis
from
Where do I find it?
7
7-16
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Shortcut menu
Feature→Revolve
Insert→Design Feature→Revolve
Right-click sketch→Revolve
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Revolve start and end angles
To specify the start and end angles of an revolve feature:
•
•
•
Use drag handles (1).
Specify values in on-screen input boxes (2).
Specify values in dialog boxes (3).
Specifying vectors using the OrientXpress tool
Use the OrientXpress tool to quickly identify a principle axis.
7
The tool works in conjunction with NX commands that require an orientation
input. It will appear when you specify a vector for a revolve axis or an extrude
direction. You can select an axis on the tool to specify a vector.
You can move the tool by clicking one of the arrowheads and dragging it
to a new location.
Essentials for NX Designers
7-17
Swept features
Create a simple revolved feature
1. Click Revolve
.
2. Select a sketch, curves, or edges for the section.
Selection Intent is available.
3. Click the middle mouse button or click Specify Vector in the Axis group
in the dialog box.
4. Specify a rotation axis through one of the following:
•
In the graphics window, select a curve, edge, relative datum axis or
plane about which to rotate the section.
•
Define a rotation axis using vector methods or the Vector Constructor
in the Axis group in the dialog box. If the vector you specify does not
have an implied point, you may need to define one using Specify Point
or the Point Constructor.
5. Specify Start and End limits by using the drag handles in the graphics
window or typing angle values.
6. Select a Boolean type.
To create a new solid body, select None.
To combine the feature with an existing solid body, select one of the other
Boolean types.
7
7. Click Apply or OK to create the feature.
7-18
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Sweep along Guide
Use the Sweep along Guide command to create a body by sweeping one
section along one guide. You can:
•
Select a section and a guide consisting of connected sketches, curves,
or edges.
•
Select a guide that contains sharp corners.
•
Create a solid body or a sheet body.
If you want to select multiple sections, multiple guides, or control the
interpolation, scale, and orientation of the sweep, use the Swept command.
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Surface→Sweep Drop-down→Sweep along Guide
Insert→Sweep→Sweep along Guide
Essentials for NX Designers
7
7-19
Swept features
Create a simple sweep along guide feature
1. Click Sweep along Guide
.
2. Select section curves or edges.
Selection Intent is available.
3. Click the middle mouse button or click Select Curve in the Guide group in
the dialog box.
4. Select guide curves or edges.
Selection Intent is available.
5. Select a Boolean type.
To create a new solid body, select None.
To combine the feature with an existing solid body, select one of the other
Boolean types.
6. Click Apply or OK to create the feature.
7
7-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Activities: Swept features
In the Swept features and Boolean operations section, do the activities:
•
Extrude a sketch
•
Extrude a sketch section
•
Revolve a sketch
7
•
Sweep along an open guide
Essentials for NX Designers
7-21
Swept features
•
Sweep along a closed guide
7
7-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Projects: Simple Sweeps
In the Projects section, there are five swept feature projects.
Tier
1
Pulley - part 2
Belt
Tier
2
Handle - part 1
7
Flywheel - part 2
Essentials for NX Designers
7-23
Swept features
Tank - part 2
These are the beginning model features for components of the compressor.
7
7-24
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept features
Summary: Swept features
Use swept features to define solid or sheet bodies using a section. A section
can be a sketch, or a collection of curves and face edges.
In this lesson you:
•
Extruded a sketch.
•
Revolved a sketch.
•
Combined bodies using a Boolean operation.
•
Swept sections along open and closed guide strings.
7
Essentials for NX Designers
7-25
7
Lesson
8
Part structure
Purpose
This lesson introduces tools to examine features, model construction, and
physical properties.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Use the Part Navigator as a tool to understand a model’s structure.
•
Use the Part Navigator and feature Browser to examine a parts’ feature
dependencies.
•
Replay model construction.
•
Suppress and unsuppress features.
•
Measure the distance between objects.
•
Assign a material and calculate mass properties.
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-1
Part structure
Part Navigator
The Part Navigator displays various aspects of your part in a detailed,
graphical tree.
You can use the Part Navigator to:
•
Update and understand the part’s basic structure.
•
Select and edit the parameters of items in the tree.
•
Arrange how the part is organized.
•
Display features, model views, drawings, user expressions, reference sets,
and unused items in the tree.
8
Where do I find it?
Resource bar
Menu
8-2
Essentials for NX Designers
Part Navigator tab
Tools→Part Navigator
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Main panel
Use the main panel to see an overall graphical representation of your part’s
structure, to edit the parameters of items, or to rearrange the feature history.
•
Double-click nodes to edit the corresponding feature.
•
Select features by their nodes during dialog box interactions.
•
Right-click nodes for shortcut options.
•
Select or clear green check boxes to control the suppression status of
features.
•
Select or clear red check boxes to control the visibility of bodies.
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-3
Part structure
Check boxes in the Part Navigator
Red check box
•
•
Indicates the current Show/Hide status.
o
Select the red check box of an item to show it.
o
Clear the red check box to hide an item and its children.
Not available when Timestamp Order is active.
8
8-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Green check box
•
Only features have a green check box.
•
The green check box enables, or disables suppression.
o
Select the green check box to unsuppress the feature.
o
Clear the green check box to suppress the feature.
Color coding and parent/child relationships in Part Navigator
The different text colors for objects displayed in the Part Navigator indicate
both their parent/child relationships and their Show/Hide status.
Object relationship
Color
Red
Parent
Blue
Child
Gray
Hidden
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-5
Part structure
Dependencies panel
Use the Dependencies panel to view the parent-child relationships of the
feature geometry selected in the main panel.
Details panel
Use the Details panel to view, and in some cases edit, the parameters
belonging to the feature selected in the main panel.
8
8-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Preview panel
Use the Preview panel to see preview images of selected items in the main
panel.
The selected item must be one that has an available preview object,
such as a saved model view or drawing view.
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-7
Part structure
Timestamp order
You can view the features in your work part in a timestamp order or by
dependencies. The timestamp order is turned on by default.
When the timestamp order is turned on:
•
All features in the work part appear in a history list of nodes in the order
of their creation timestamp.
•
You cannot expand or collapse feature nodes.
•
You cannot view all node types.
Part Navigator
Name
Model History
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Sketch (1) “PROFILE” (1)
Extrude (2)
Extrude (3)
Unite (4)
Revolve (5)
Datum Plane (6)
The timestamp order view is not available in the History-free mode.
8
8-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
When the timestamp order is turned off:
•
All bodies in the work part, along with their features and operations, are
shown in the main panel.
•
You can expand or collapse feature nodes.
Part Navigator
Name
Unused Items
Datum Plane (6)
Reference Sets
Model
Sheet Body “Revolve (5)”
Revolve (5)
Datum Coordinate System (0)
Solid Body “Extrude (2)”
Unite (4)
Solid Body “Extrude (3)”
Extrude (2)
Sketch (1) “PROFILE”
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-9
Part structure
Switch between timestamp order view and design view
You can switch between the timestamp order view and the design view of the
main panel of the Part Navigator .
To enable the timestamp order view, do one of the following:
•
Choose Tools→Part Navigator→Timestamp Order.
•
Right-click in the background of the Part Navigator or in the title bar, and
select the Timestamp Order check box.
8
8-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
To enable the design view, do one of the following:
•
Choose Tools→Part Navigator and turn off Timestamp Order.
•
Right-click in the background of the Part Navigator or in the title bar and
clear the Timestamp Order check box.
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-11
Part structure
Part Navigator shortcut menu
Right-click a feature node in the Part Navigator to display a feature specific
shortcut menu.
The options available depend on the type of feature you select.
Many options require the Modeling application to be active.
•
Hide and Show — Lets you show or hide feature and body objects. Items
that you hide are still displayed in the Part Navigator, but in a gray text
font.
•
Hide Parents and Show Parents — Display or hide parent curves,
sketches, or datums.
•
Edit Parameters — Edit the feature’s parameters, the same as
Edit→Feature→Edit Parameters.
•
Edit with Rollback — Roll the model back to its state just before the
feature was created, and then open the feature’s creation dialog box.
Edit with Rollback is shown in bold type in the shortcut menu.
In any shortcut menu, the option in bold type is the default
double-click action.
•
Suppress and Unsuppress — Temporarily remove and restore a feature
display from the part history.
A suppressed feature still affects some editing operations.
•
Reorder Before and Reorder After — Change the timestamp of features.
Creation order is important to permit use of a feature as a parent, and
in the Replace Feature command.
You can also drag nodes to valid locations.
8
8-12
•
Feature Group — Organize features in a named collection so that it is
easier to identify them and use them in downstream operations.
•
Assign Feature Color — Assigns a color property to a feature. The color is
inherited by all faces that are created or modified by the feature.
•
Replace — Replace a feature’s definition by another feature.
•
Show Dimensions — Display the feature’s parameter values until you
refresh the display.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
•
Make Current Feature — Insert new features immediately after the
current feature.
•
Extract Body Here — Extracts an associative copy of the body as it exists
following the selected feature (in time stamp order).
•
Select Whole Branch — Select the feature and all nodes with earlier
timestamps.
•
Filter — Simplify the display tree by hiding features by type or timestamp
order.
To turn off a filter, place the cursor in the Part Navigator away from
a feature node, right-click and choose Apply Filter from the shortcut
menu to make it inactive.
•
Make Sketch Internal and Make Sketch External — Internalize or
externalize a sketch that is a parent of the selected feature.
•
Edit Sketch — Edit the parent sketch of the selected feature. This option
appears only when the feature has a parent sketch.
•
Copy — Place a copy of a feature on a clipboard.
•
Delete — Delete the selected feature, the same as Edit→Delete.
•
Browse — Displays a graph view of features and relations between
features.
•
Hide Body and Show — Hide or show the body containing the selected
feature.
•
Rename — Append a user-defined name to the feature.
•
Browse — Explore the parent and child relationships of features.
•
Information — Display information about the selected feature in the
Information window.
•
Properties — Open the properties dialog box for the selected feature.
8
General properties include the feature name.
Attributes you assign appear in a column of the Part Navigator. See the
online Help for details.
Essentials for NX Designers
8-13
Part structure
Feature Replay
Use Feature Replay to review how features were used to construct a model.
You can:
•
Manually step through the features of a model using the commands on
the Feature Replay toolbar or Tools→Update menu.
•
Play, pause, and select a starting feature for an uninterrupted replay of
the model using the Automatic Feature Replay command.
•
Set a time-interval for each step in an automatic replay.
•
Review features for problems during a feature replay, and fix them if
necessary. The feature on which you stop the replay automatically
becomes the current feature.
When used with a Part Module, you can:
•
Deactivate the part module.
•
Specify part module outputs.
•
Update the input links to the Linked Part Module part.
•
Update the output links of the Linked Part Module part.
Feature Replay is not a feature validation tool. Use the Playback
command on the Edit→Feature menu for feature validation and
correction.
8
8-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Where do I find it?
Feature Replay
Toolbar
Prerequisite
A feature must appear in the Part Navigator in order to
step to it with Feature Replay.
Tools→Update→
Make First Feature Current
Make Previous Feature Current
Make Next Feature Current
Make Last Feature Current
Make Next Boolean Current
Automatic Feature Replay
Format→Part Module→
Menu
Specify Outputs
Update Input References
Update Output References
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-15
Part structure
Reorder Feature
Use the Reorder Feature command to change the order in which a feature
is applied to a body. The desired feature can be reordered before or after
a selected reference feature.
As you create features, a time stamp is assigned to each one. When you
modify a body, the update follows the order of the feature time stamps.
In this example, the interior topology of a part is modified by moving the
shell feature up in the history tree.
Where do I find it?
8
8-16
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Edit Feature→Reorder Feature
Edit→Feature→Reorder
Right-click a feature node in the Part
Navigator→Reorder.
Shortcut menu
In the Part Navigator, drag and drop feature nodes.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Reorder an object in the Part Navigator
To change an objects timestamp order, use this procedure to reorder an object
in the Part Navigator
1. In the Part Navigator, right-click the column heading and select
Timestamp Order.
2. Drag the object to reorder it to the timestamp you require.
If you attempt to create a circular relationship or position an object at
an invalid timestamp, your edit will be rejected.
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-17
Part structure
Feature Dimension
Use Feature Dimension to view and edit dimension values for feature
parameters and sketches.
1. Internal sketch section dimensions
2. Feature parameter dimensions (Extrude)
•
The sketch dimensions must be driving dimensions.
•
You can move a feature dimension by dragging it.
Not all features support dynamic dimension editing in the graphics
window using Show Dimensions.
Where do I find it?
Application
Toolbar
Menu
Graphics window
and Part
Navigator
8
8-18
Essentials for NX Designers
Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, and other
applications
Edit Feature→ Feature Dimension
Edit→Feature→ Feature Dimension
Right-click and choose Show Dimensions
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Model information
The Information menu offers a number of options to obtain information
about the model.
Information→Object
•
•
Displays information about selected objects such as name, layer, color,
object type, and geometric properties (length, diameter, start and end
coordinates, etc.) in an Information window.
Any type of geometric object may be selected including curves, edges,
faces, and bodies.
Information→Point
•
•
Opens the Point dialog box.
Displays absolute and work coordinate information of an explicit or
implicit point you specify.
Information→Spline
•
•
Opens the Spline Analysis dialog box.
You specify whether to display knot points and poles and the extent of
the information for the analysis.
Information→Surface
•
•
Displays U and V directions, control polygons and patch boundaries of
B-surfaces.
Lists information such as degree and number of poles and patches.
Information→Browser
•
Displays a graph view of features and relations between features..
Information→Expression→List All
•
•
8
Lists all expressions in the part in the Information window.
From the Information window, you can print the listing or save it as a
text file.
Information→Expression→List All by Reference
•
•
Identifies expressions that reference other expressions and the features
that they define.
You can use the Edit→Find option on the Information window menu bar
to search for a specific expression.
Essentials for NX Designers
8-19
Part structure
Browser
Use the Browser graph view window to explore basic parent-child relations
between features and their ancestor and descendant objects. Non-feature
geometry, such as non-associative curve parents, are also included in the
browser window.
When you roll-over an object node in the Browser window it highlights in the
graphics window, and if it is associative, in the Part Navigator.
8
8-20
•
You can click an expression parameter in a feature reference node and
edit its value directly in the browser window.
•
You can explore the ancestors of a feature reference node and determine
how they might be affected by an edit.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Where do I find it?
Application
Menu
Modeling, Shape Studio
Information→Browser
Right-click a feature→Browse
Graphics window
Right-click an expression
Right-click a feature→Browse
Part Navigator
Right-click an expression→Browse
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-21
Part structure
Types of features you can browse
You can browse the following feature types in the Browser:
•
Body-based features
•
Curve features
•
Point features
•
Datum features
•
Sketch features
To interact with a node in the browser:
•
Click a node to expand it.
•
Right-click a node to display a shortcut menu.
•
Double-click or right-click a node to edit it.
You can also browse non-feature relations.
•
Expressions (both feature expressions and user expressions)
•
Non-feature geometry that has relations to a feature, such as a
non-associative curve that is the parent of a feature
You can perform the following actions on geometry in the browser:
•
Hide a body (using Hide Body)
•
Show parents
•
Hide parents
•
Show a body (using Show Body)
You can use the following commands on features in the browser:
8
8-22
•
Suppress Feature / Unsuppress Feature
•
Replace Feature
•
Make Current Feature / Make Current Tool Feature / Isolate Tool Body
•
Delete
•
Properties
•
Edit Parameters and Edit with Rollback
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Referenced expressions
If an expression defines a feature directly, the feature name is listed with it in
the Expressions dialog box.
Any expression can be referenced by the formula of other expressions.
You can identify all referencing expressions by using List References in the
shortcut menu.
List referenced expressions
1. Choose Tools→Expression.
2. If necessary, change the Listed Expressions filter to list the expression.
3. Right-click the expression and choose List References.
8
An Information window lists the features and other expressions that
reference the selected expression.
Essentials for NX Designers
8-23
Part structure
Simple Measure commands
Use the Simple Measure commands to obtain measurements quickly. These
commands have simplified dialog boxes.
•
Simple Distance calculates the
distance between two objects.
•
Simple Angle calculates the angle
between two objects.
•
Simple Length calculates the
length of the selected curve.
•
Simple Radius calculates the
radius of circular objects.
•
Simple Diameter calculates the
diameter of circular objects.
Where do I find it?
Utility→Simple Measure Drop-down list→Simple
8
Distance
Toolbar
Menu
8-24
Essentials for NX Designers
or Simple Angle
or Simple Length
or Simple Radius
or Simple Diameter
Analysis→Measure→Simple Distance or Simple Angle
or Simple Length or Simple Radius or Simple Diameter
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Measure Distance
Use the Measure Distance command to obtain robust distance analysis
information between any two objects such as points, curves, planes, bodies,
edges, faces, or components.
•
You can specify measurements that are associative to the objects being
measured.
•
You can specify to have information displayed in an Information window
in addition to being displayed on-screen, and create on-screen annotation
lines and dimension objects.
•
You can control the color and text characteristics of measurement objects.
•
To specify units for distance measurements, choose Analysis→Units.
Where do I find it?
Application
Gateway
Toolbar
Menu
Utility→Measure Distance
Analysis→Measure Distance
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-25
Part structure
Find the minimum distance between two objects
1. On the Utility toolbar, click Measure Distance
Analysis→Measure Distance.
or choose
2. In the Measure Distance dialog box, from the Type list, select Distance.
3. In the Measurement group, from the Distance list, select Minimum.
4. Select the first point or object.
5. Select the second point or object.
A temporary ruler and measurement result are displayed in the graphics
window.
In the Results Display group, select the Show Information Window
check box to display result details in the Information window.
8
8-26
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Measure Bodies
Use the Measure Bodies command to calculate the volume, mass, surface
area, radius of gyration, weight, and centroid of selected bodies.
To specify units for body measurements, choose Analysis→Units.
There are two ways to assign a density to a solid body.
•
Choose Tools→Materials→Assign Materials and assign a material.
•
Choose Edit→Feature→Solid Density.
The default density is specified in Modeling Preferences.
Where do I find it?
Application
Toolbar
Menu
Gateway, Modeling, Shape Studio
Active Mockup→Analysis Drop-down list→Measure
Bodies
Analysis→Measure Bodies
Essentials for NX Designers
8
8-27
Part structure
Assign a material to a solid body
1. Choose Tools→Material→Assign Materials.
The materials in the NX Material Library are listed by default. You may
create additional custom materials.
2. In the graphics window, select the solid body.
3. If the material is not listed in the Assign Material dialog box, expand the
Filters list and search for the material by name, category, or type.
4. In the Materials dialog box, select a material from the Materials list.
5. Click OK.
8
8-28
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Delayed updates
As you add features to your model, it may take noticeably longer to update.
You can delay updates until after edits are made.
From the main menu, choose Tools→Update→Delay Model Update, or on the
Edit Feature toolbar, click Delay Model Update
.
•
If Delay Model Update is inactive, the part is updated after the completion
of each edit operation. This is the default setting.
•
If Delay Model Update is active, feature updates are delayed while edits
are made.
When Delay Model Update is active and edits are made, Update Model
is available.
Choose Tools→Update→Update Model, or, on the Edit Feature toolbar, click
Update Model
.
The model is updated automatically when the part is saved.
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-29
Part structure
Activities: Part structure
In the Part structure section, do the activity:
•
Reorder Features
•
Explore object and feature relations with the Browser
•
Examine part structure
8
8-30
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Part structure
Summary: Part structure
In this lesson, you examined features, expressions, design intent, and
properties of a model. These skills are important to review models created by
other users.
In this lesson you:
•
Accessed the Part Navigator.
•
Identified expressions and feature dependency with the Part Navigator
and feature Browser.
•
Reviewed the model construction using Feature Replay, Suppress, and
Unsuppress.
•
Measured a distance.
•
Calculated mass properties.
8
Essentials for NX Designers
8-31
8
Lesson
9
Using sketches
Purpose
This lesson explains additional sketch editing methods.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Edit sketches directly in Modeling and in the Sketch task environment.
•
Determine an alternate solution.
•
Attach and Reattach a sketch.
•
Mirror sketch curves.
•
Make sketch curves symmetric.
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-1
Using sketches
Edit sketches with drag
You can use drag to edit the location and shape of your sketch. You can drag
unconstrained sketch curves or points in unconstrained directions.
You can also use the Dimensions dialog box to edit a dimension by using
the value slider.
Techniques for editing sketch curves with drag.
•
There is no dialog box for this command. You can just drag selected
objects in the graphics window.
•
You can drag sketch curves that are partially constrained or
unconstrained.
•
You can drag fully constrained sketches if they have not yet been
positioned.
When you drag constrained curves they are scaled as necessary to
preserve the constraints.
•
You can apply Inferred constraints if you drag the free end of a line.
In the following example, L5 (1) is being dragged while L4 and L6
(2) stretch. L5 is constrained so it maintains its angular and length
relationship.
9
9-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Drag to assist sketch constraints
You can drag curves to approximate the correct location before you constrain
them.
This is useful when constraining curves at their original location distorts the
sketch, making it difficult to continue.
The following example shows the distortion that can be caused when
you attempt to drag objects with too many applied constraints.
The following example shows the result of dragging an entire
unconstrained profile from one quadrant to another.
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-3
Using sketches
Copy, move, and edit sketch objects
To
Move curves, points, or dimensions
Do This
Drag the curves, points, or dimensions
Move curves or points vertically or
horizontally with snapping
Hold Shift and drag the curves or
points
Move curves or points vertically or
horizontally without snapping
Hold Shift+Alt and drag the curves
or points
Copy curves or points
Copy curves or points vertically or
horizontally without snapping
Edit objects
Choose a command
Hold Ctrl and drag the curves or
points
Hold Ctrl+Shift and drag the curves
or points
Double–click the objects
Right–click the objects
If you are in another command that requires a selection, you must exit
the command before you perform these actions. To exit a command,
press Esc.
9
9-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Create Inferred Constraints
Use the Create Inferred Constraints option to turn on inferred geometric
constraints during curve construction. This option is turned on by default,
and it creates the geometric constraints that you select in the Inferred
Constraints and Dimensions dialog box. The setting for this option is stored
with each sketch in the part file.
If you turn off this option, you can take advantage of the geometric constraints
as you work, but the actual geometric constraints are not stored in your
sketch. Consider turning this option off when:
•
You have a large complicated sketch and you do not want to store all the
geometric constraints.
•
You want to record your design intent using your own geometric
constraints instead of the ones that NX infers.
In the following example, the Create Inferred Constraints option is turned
off. The parallel (1) and tangent (2) geometric constraints are available
during curve creation, but the geometric constraints are not created when
the curve is completed.
•
To lock a previewed geometric constraint before you select the end
of the curve, click the middle mouse button.
•
To sketch curves without creating geometric constraints, hold the
Alt key to temporarily disable the following:
o
Create Inferred Constraints option
o
Sketch help lines
o
Snap point
Essentials for NX Designers
9
9-5
Using sketches
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling)
Direct Sketch→Create Inferred Constraints
(Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Create Inferred Constraints
Menu
(Modeling)
Tools→Sketch Constraints→Create Inferred
Constraints
(Sketch task environment)
Tools→Constraints→Create Inferred Constraints
9
9-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Auto Constrain
The Auto Constrain command creates specific multiple geometric constraint
types to selected sketch objects. The selected geometry is analyzed based on
the command settings and the constraints are applied to your sketch.
This can be especially useful when you add geometry to the active sketch,
particularly if that geometry was imported from a different CAD system.
You can also use this to apply a single constraint type to multiple sketch
objects, for example apply a tangent constraint to multiple fillets and their
adjacent curves.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Auto Constrain
(Sketch task environment) Sketch Tools→Auto
Constrain
Menu
(Modeling) Tools→Sketch Constraints→Auto
Constrain
(Sketch task environment) Tools→Constraints→Auto
Constrain
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-7
Using sketches
Auto Dimension
Use the Auto Dimension command to create dimensions on selected curves
and points according to a set of rules.
You can apply the following rules in any order.
•
Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions on Lines
•
Create Dimensions to Reference Axes
•
Create Symmetric Dimensions
•
Create Length Dimensions
•
Create Adjacent Angles
Driving and Automatic Dimensions
You can create two types of dimensions.
Driving
Creates a dimension based on an expression. You can convert driving
dimensions to reference dimensions.
Automatic
This type of dimensional constraint can only be created by auto
dimensioning. Automatic dimensions remove degrees of freedom from the
sketch, and act like a constant length or angle constraint with a value.
• When you drag sketch curves, automatic dimensions are relaxed,
allowing you to shape the sketch. After the drag, the new shape will
be constrained by the automatic dimensions again.
•
If you add a constraint that conflicts with an automatic dimension, the
automatic dimension is deleted.
•
You can convert automatic dimensions into driving or reference
dimensions.
All dimensions are displayed in the Part Navigator when Timestamp
Order is turned off in the Unused Items→Sketch→Curves and
Dimensions→Dimensions folder.
9
Why should I use it?
In Modeling, use this command to assist in creating a fully constrained sketch
by removing all degrees of freedom from the selected curves.
In Drafting, use this command to fully dimension selected sketch curves
in a drawing.
9-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Auto Dimension
(Drafting and Sketch task environment) Sketch
Tools→Auto Dimension
Menu
(Modeling) Tools→Sketch Constraints→Auto
Dimension
(Drafting and Sketch task environment)
Tools→Constraints→Auto Dimension
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-9
Using sketches
Activity: Auto Dimensioning Rules
In the Using sketches section, do the activity:
Auto Dimensioning Rules
9
9-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Alternate Solution
Use the Alternate Solution command to display alternate solutions for both
dimensional and geometric constraints, and select a result. The example
below shows how the geometry changes when you choose Alternate Solution
and select a dimension.
Perpendicular, Horizontal, and Vertical dimensions maintain their direction
when the expression value is set to zero. You can also enter negative values
for these three dimension types to achieve the same results as using the
Alternate Solution command.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Alternate Solution
(Sketch task environment) Sketch Tools→Alternate
Solution
Menu
(Modeling) Tools→Sketch Constraints→Alternate
Solution
(Sketch task environment)
Tools→Constraints→Alternate Solution
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-11
Using sketches
Use Alternate Solution on tangent constraints
1. On the Sketch Tools toolbar, click Alternate Solution
.
2. For Object 1, Select Linear Dimension or Geometry , select either the
line or arc.
If either curve does not have a tangency constraint you will not
be able to select the object. But you can select the geometry in
any order.
3. For Object 2, Select Tangent Geometry, select the corresponding line or
arc.
If the range of movement is limited to a single direction this step
may not be necessary.
4. Click Close.
In the following example, Alternate Solution was used to properly
create the fillet by modifying the tangent constraint.
9
9-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Use Alternate Solution on a dimension
1. On the Sketch Tools toolbar, click Alternate Solution
.
2. For Object 1, Select Linear Dimension or Geometry, select a sketch
dimension.
The change is immediate. Simply select the dimension again to
restore the previous solution.
In the following example, the sketch dimension p19 (1) was selected
and an alternate solution found. In this case the alternate solution was
to reverse the direction of the sketch curves (2).
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-13
Using sketches
Activities: Experiment with alternate solutions
In the Using sketches section, do the activity:
Experiment with alternate solutions
9
9-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Edit Dimension Associativity
Use the Edit Dimension Associativity command to attach an existing
dimension to different objects. When you attach a dimension you can:
•
Retain the expression value and resize the target geometry to match it.
•
Change the expression value to match the target geometry.
Perpendicular, Horizontal, and Vertical dimensions will maintain their
creation direction so that the dimension will not flip to a different correct
result.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling)
Direct Sketch→Edit Dimension Associativity
(Sketch task environment)
Sketch Tools→Edit Dimension Associativity
Menu
Shortcut Menu
(Modeling)
Tools→Sketch Constraints→Edit Dimension
Associativity
(Sketch task environment)
Tools→Constraints→Edit Dimension Associativity
Right-click a dimension and choose Edit Associativity
Essentials for NX Designers
9-15
9
Using sketches
Attach a Dimension to different geometry
This example shows you how to attach a dimension to a different curve.
Note that you can optionally measure the target geometry and assign its
geometric value to the dimension variable.
1. Right–click the dimension leader line you want to attach and choose Edit
Associativity.
2. Expand the Settings group and make sure Expression Mode is set to
Remove Expression, Measure Geometry.
9
9-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
3. Left–click the new curve.
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-17
Using sketches
Reattach Sketch
Use the Reattach command to:
•
Move a sketch to a different plane, face, or path.
•
Switch a Sketch in Place to a Sketch on Path and vice versa.
•
Change the location of a sketch on path along the path to which it is
attached.
•
Specify a new horizontal or vertical reference.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Reattach
(Sketch task environment) Sketch→Reattach
Menu
(Modeling and Sketch task environment)
Tools→Reattach
9
9-18
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Reattach a sketch on plane
Use this procedure to reattach a sketch to a planar surface.
1. Open the target sketch for editing.
2. On the Direct Sketch toolbar, click Reattach
.
3. Select the new target planar surface.
The preview sketch CSYS moves from the original face to the new
face.
4. Optional: Expand the Sketch Orientation group, from the Reference list,
choose either Horizontal or Vertical.
5. Optional: Click Select Reference and define the new reference direction
.
6. Click OK.
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-19
Using sketches
Activities: Reattach sketches
In the Using sketches section, do the activity:
•
Reattach a sketch to a new face
9
9-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Mirror Curve
Use the Mirror Curve command to make a mirrored copy of sketch geometry
through a specified sketch line. NX applies mirror geometric constraints
to all the geometry.
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Mirror Curve
(Drafting and Sketch task environment) Sketch
Tools→Mirror Curve
Menu
(Modeling and Drafting) Insert→Sketch Curve→Mirror
Curve
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Curve from
Curves→Mirror Curve
Mirror sketch curves
1. On the Direct Sketch toolbar, click Mirror Curve
.
2. Select the curves you need to mirror.
9
3. For the Centerline, select an existing sketch curve.
4. Click OK.
Essentials for NX Designers
9-21
Using sketches
Make Symmetric
Use the Make Symmetric command to constrain two points or curves to be
symmetric about a centerline in a sketch.
You can apply the symmetry constraint between two objects of the same type:
•
Lines
•
Arcs
•
Circles
You can also make different point types symmetric. For example, you make
the end of a line and the center of an arc symmetric about a line.
Why should I use it?
Use this command when you create or edit a sketch and you want to control
the position of existing sketch geometry to be symmetric to a centerline.
To create a Symmetric constraint with Make Symmetric, the Sketch
Style command, Create Inferred Constraints option must first be
selected.
9
9-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Where do I find it?
(Modeling) Direct Sketch→Make Symmetric
(Drafting and Sketch task environment) Sketch
Toolbar
Tools→Make Symmetric
(Modeling and Drafting) Insert→Sketch
Constraint→Make Symmetric
Menu
(Sketch task environment) Insert→Make Symmetric
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-23
Using sketches
Activities: Mirror and Make Symmetric
In the Using sketches section, do the activity:
Create Symmetric Constraints
9
9-24
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Using sketches
Sketch evaluation and update techniques
You would use this process to control when the system evaluates a sketch
for updating.
•
Click Delay Evaluation
•
Create or edit sketch constraints or curves.
•
Click Evaluate Sketch
•
Optional: To update the model while still in the sketch, on the Sketch
.
.
Tools toolbar, click Update Model
.
Update Model is not available when you use Edit with Rollback
to open your sketch for editing. However, all models are updated
as soon as you exit the sketch.
9
Essentials for NX Designers
9-25
Using sketches
Summary: Using sketches
Sketching can used to plan, edit, and manipulate your design through every
phase of the design cycle.
In this lesson you:
•
Edited sketches directly in Modeling and in the Sketch task environment.
•
Created sketches using the Auto Dimensioning command.
•
Applied alternate solutions to obtain appropriate profiles.
•
Reattached sketches.
•
Mirrored curves.
•
Made curves symmetric.
9
9-26
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Lesson
10 Trim Body
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Trim Body command to define the topology of
a solid body.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Trim a solid body to a plane or sheet body.
10
Essentials for NX Designers
10-1
Trim Body
Trim Body
Use Trim Body to trim one or more target bodies using a face or plane. You
can specify the portion of the body to retain and the portion to discard. The
target bodies take the shape of the trimming geometry.
•
You must select at least one target body.
•
You can select a single face, multiple faces from the same body, or a datum
plane to trim the target bodies.
•
You can define a new plane to trim the target bodies.
You would use Trim Body to remove:
•
Material using datum planes for complex chamfers or cutouts.
•
Material using surfaces (sheet bodies) for more complex shapes.
•
Overlapping geometry before completing other boolean operations.
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Feature→Trim Body
Insert→Trim→Trim Body
10
10-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Trim Body
Trim a solid body to a face
This example shows how to trim a single, solid target body to the face of
a sheet body.
1. On the Feature toolbar, click Trim Body
Body.
or choose Insert→Trim→Trim
2. Select the target body to trim.
3. In the Tool Option list, make sure Face or Plane is selected.
4. In the Tool group, make sure that Select Face or Plane
is active.
5. Select the face of the sheet body.
10
Essentials for NX Designers
10-3
Trim Body
A vector points toward the portion of the target body to be removed.
6. (Optional) If the vector is not pointing toward the portion of the target
body you want to remove, click Reverse Direction
.
7. Click OK or Apply to create the Trim Body feature.
10
10-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Trim Body
Activities: Trim Body
In the Trim Body section, do the activity:
•
Trim a solid body
10
Essentials for NX Designers
10-5
Trim Body
Projects: Trim Body
In the Projects section, there is one trimming project.
Tier 1
Cylinder head part 1
In the project you create and constrain a sketch curve to create a revolved
trimming sheet. The trimming sheet is used to trim the cylinder head body.
10
10-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Trim Body
Summary: Trim Body
Use the Trim Body command to define the topology of a body.
In this lesson you:
•
Trimmed a solid body to a plane and a sheet body.
10
Essentials for NX Designers
10-7
10
11
Lesson
11 Swept feature options
Purpose
This lesson introduces draft, offsets, and selection intent to define profiles and
swept features.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Apply selection intent to define sections from intersecting curves and
multiple loops.
•
Create an extruded feature with offsets.
•
Create an extruded feature with draft.
Essentials for NX Designers
11-1
Swept feature options
11
Extrude start and end limits
Use the limit options to define the overall construction method and the
extents of the extrude feature.
Options
11-2
Value
Specify numeric values for the start or
end of the extrusion.
Symmetric Value
Converts the Start limit distance to the
same value as the End limit.
Until Next
Extends the extrude feature to the next
body along the direction path.
Until Selected
Extends the extrude feature to a face,
datum plane, or body that you select.
Until Extended
Trims the extrude feature (if it is a body)
to a face you select when the section
extends beyond its edges.
Through All
Extends the extrude feature completely
through all selectable bodies along the
path of the specified direction.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept feature options
11
Extrude with offset
The Offset options lets you specify up to two offsets to the profile for extruded
and revolved sections. You can assign unique values for both offsets.
You can:
•
Type values for the offsets in the Start and End boxes in the dialog box.
•
Type values in on-screen input boxes in the graphics window.
•
Drag the offset handles.
Options
None
Create no offset.
Single-Sided
Add a single end offset to the extrude.
Two-Sided
Add an offset with duplicate start and end values,
measured from opposite sides of the section.
The value for both start and end is determined by the last
one you specify.
Symmetric
Add an offset with duplicate start and end values.
Start
Start the offset at the value you specify, measured from
the section.
End
End the offset at the value you specify, measured from the
section.
Essentials for NX Designers
11-3
Swept feature options
11
Two sided offset examples
The start and end offset values may be positive or negative.
The positive direction is shown by the End Offset drag handle.
Start Offset Zero, End Offset Positive
Start Offset Zero, End Offset Negative
Start Offset Negative, End Offset Positive
11-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept feature options
11
Single-sided offset examples
The single-sided examples are based on offsets to the section shown.
Offset value too large
If the end value becomes so large that a self-intersecting body is created, the
preview disappears.
Smaller positive offset
In this example the offset is small enough to support a preview. The offset
body is valid.
Essentials for NX Designers
11-5
Swept feature options
11
Negative offset
In this example the offset is negative, and small enough to support a preview.
The offset body is valid.
11-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept feature options
11
Extrude with draft
You can add draft, or slope, to one or more sides of an extrude feature.
You can only add a draft to an extrude feature based on a planar section.
Draft types:
•
From Start Limit – Creates a draft beginning from the extrude start limit.
The original size of the extruded section is maintained at the start limit.
•
From Section – Creates a draft beginning from the extrude section. The
original size of the extruded section is maintained at the section plane.
•
From Section – Asymmetric Angle – Available when the extrude feature
extends from both sides of the section. This creates a draft starting from
the extrude section, sloping in different directions both in front and back
of the section.
Essentials for NX Designers
11-7
Swept feature options
11
•
From Section – Symmetric Angle – Available when the extrude feature
extends from both sides of the section. This creates a draft starting from
the extrude section, sloping at the same angle in opposite directions both
in front and back of the section.
•
From Section – Matched Ends – Available when the extrude feature
extends from both sides of the section. This creates a draft starting from
the extrude section, sloping in opposite directions both in the front and
the back of the section. The shape at the end limit is matched to that of
the start limit, and the draft angle for the end limit changes to maintain
the matched shape
Angle options:
11-8
•
Single – Adds a single draft angle for all faces of the extrude feature.
•
Multiple – Adds unique draft angles to each tangent chain of faces of the
extrude feature.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept feature options
11
Positive and negative draft angles
If you look at the body with your eye positioned with respect to the draft
vector as shown, positive draft angles (1) enable you to see the draft feature
faces, and negative draft angles (2) hide the draft feature faces.
Draft and the extrude direction
Draft is measured with respect to the extrude direction. The extrude direction
does not need to be perpendicular to a planar section.
Essentials for NX Designers
11-9
Swept feature options
11
Draft offset example
Draft offset example is based on this
extruded section.
1. Draft option is From Section-Asymmetric
Angle
2. Front Angle value is set to 5°
3. Back Angle value is set to 0°
4. Offset option is Two Sided
5. Start offset is –5
6. End offset is 5
11-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept feature options
11
DesignLogic parameter entry options
Parameter entry options let you define your model parametrically as you
specify feature values.
To access the options, click
next to the text input box.
You may specify a value based on a:
•
Measurement.
•
Formula.
•
Math or knowledge-based function.
•
Reference to an existing value.
•
Conversion of the above to a constant.
•
Recently used value that you want to use again.
Essentials for NX Designers
11-11
Swept feature options
11
Reference existing parameters
1. From the parameter entry options list, select Reference.
The Parameter Selection dialog box appears.
Initially, the list is empty.
2. Select an existing feature.
The list is populated with the feature’s parameters and their descriptions.
3. Select a parameter (1).
4. Click OK (2).
The parameter name now appears in the box (3).
11-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept feature options
11
Activities: Swept feature options
In the Swept feature options section, do the activities:
•
Extrude using selection intent
•
Extrude with offsets
•
Extrude with draft
Essentials for NX Designers
11-13
Swept feature options
11
Project: Advanced sweeps
In the Projects section, there are three advanced sweeping projects.
Tier 1
Pulley - part 3
Tier 2
Flywheel - part 3
Tank - part 3
These projects refine your basic compressor model bodies with more advanced
sweeping techniques.
11-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Swept feature options
11
Summary: Swept feature options
Use selection intent to quickly specify sections by applying rules to complex
sets of curves.
Extrude or revolve with offsets to thicken simple sections or alter sections.
Incorporate draft in extruded features instead of using separate draft features
to simplify your history tree.
Use DesignLogic to increase productivity when modelling parametrically.
In this lesson you:
•
Applied selection intent to define sections.
•
Extruded with offsets.
•
Extruded with draft.
Essentials for NX Designers
11-15
11
Lesson
12 Hole features
12
Purpose
This lesson introduces the general hole feature.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create general hole features.
•
Position hole features.
•
Edit the parameters and location of hole features.
Essentials for NX Designers
12-1
Hole features
Hole
Use the Hole command to add the following types of hole features in a part
or assembly:
12
•
General holes (simple, counterbored, countersunk, or tapered form)
•
Drill Size holes
•
Screw Clearance holes (simple, counterbored, or countersunk form)
•
Threaded holes
•
Holes on non-planar faces
•
Holes through multiple solids as a single feature
•
Multiple holes as a single feature
1. Threaded Hole
2. Counterbored
3. Countersunk
Where do I find it?
12-2
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Feature→Hole
Insert→Design Feature→Hole
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Hole features
Hole dialog box
The Hole dialog box includes four groups that are unique to hole features.
•
•
•
•
Type
Position
Direction
Form and Dimensions
12
The options available within the groups will change depending on which type
and form you select.
Essentials for NX Designers
12-3
Hole features
Hole positioning options
In the Position group, you can use one of the following methods to specify the
position of the hole feature.
12
Sketch Section – Create a sketch to define the location of the center
of the hole.
Point – Specify the center of the hole using existing points. Use
snap point and selection intent options to select existing points or feature
points.
12-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Hole features
Hole direction options
In the Direction group, you can use one of the following methods to specify
the position of the hole feature.
12
Normal to Face – Select a face. The hole is normal to the selected
face at the position point.
Along Vector – Specify a vector for hole direction by using vector
construction options or the vector dialog box.
In the illustration below, an associative datum axis provides the direction
of the narrow hole.
Essentials for NX Designers
12-5
Hole features
Hole form and dimension options
Simple
1. Diameter
2. Depth
12
3. Tip Angle
Counterbore
1. C-Bore Diameter
2. C-Bore Depth
3. Depth
Countersink
1. C-Sink Diameter
2. C-Sink Angle
3. Depth
Tapered
1. Diameter
2. Taper Angle
3. Depth
12-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Hole features
Create a General Hole feature
This example shows how to create a General Hole feature at the center
of circular edge.
1. On the Feature toolbar, click Hole
Feature→Hole.
12
or choose Insert→Design
2. In the Hole dialog box, from the Type list, select General Hole.
3. On the Selection bar, make sure that Arc Center
is selected.
4. In the graphics window, click on the cylindrical edge to select the arc
center.
5. In the Form and Dimensions group, from the Form list, select the form.
For this example, Countersunk is selected.
6. In the Dimension group, enter values for C–Sink Diameter, C–Sink
Angle, and Diameter.
For this example, the Depth Limit list is set to Through Body.
Essentials for NX Designers
12-7
Hole features
7. Click OK to create the General Hole feature.
12
Final Hole
Countersink angle
Countersink diameter
Hole diameter
12-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Hole features
Activities: Hole features
In the Hole features section, do the activities:
•
Create holes in a compressor housing
•
Edit holes of a compressor housing
12
Essentials for NX Designers
12-9
Hole features
Project: Hole features
In the Projects section, there are four Hole projects.
12
Tier 1
Pulley - part 4
Tier 2
Handle - part 2
Flywheel - part 4
Tank - part 4
In these projects you create fastener holes, shaft holes and keyway holes for
the components of the compressor.
12-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Hole features
Summary: Hole features
Hole features are one of several features with predefined shapes.
In this lesson you:
•
Created general hole features.
•
Positioned a hole using a sketch.
•
Edited parameters and locations of holes.
12
Essentials for NX Designers
12-11
12
Lesson
13 Shell
13
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Shell command.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create a shell feature.
•
Specify faces to be removed, and apply an alternate thickness to a face.
Essentials for NX Designers
13-1
Shell
Shell
Use the Shell command to hollow out a solid body or to create a shell around
it by specifying wall thicknesses. You can also assign individual thicknesses
to faces or remove individual faces.
13
Where do I find it?
13-2
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Shortcut menu
Feature→Shell
Insert→Offset/Scale→Shell
Right-click a solid body→Shell
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Shell
Create a shell
1. On the Feature toolbar, click Shell
.
2. Choose the type of shell you want to create:
•
•
in the Face to
Remove Faces, Then Shell — Click Select Face
Pierce group to specify one or more faces to remove from the target
solid.
Shell All Faces — Click Select Body
to select the body to shell.
in the Body to Shell group
3. In the Thickness group, type a distance value in the Thickness box.
4. (Optional) In the Thickness group, click Reverse Direction
.
5. (Optional) Assign different thicknesses to different faces in the solid.
6. (Optional) Set or change the Tangent Edges, Resolve Self-intersections
Using Patches, and Tolerance options in the Settings group.
7. Click OK or Apply to create the shell.
Essentials for NX Designers
13-3
13
Shell
Assign alternate thicknesses
1. Click Select Face
in the Alternate Thicknesses group and select the
faces for the first face set.
2. Type a thickness value in the Thickness n box.
You can also drag the thickness handle or type a value in its on-screen
input box.
13
Thickness n refers to Thickness 1, Thickness 2, Thickness 3, and
so on.
If the direction is wrong, click Reverse Direction
3. Click Add New Set
set.
for the face set.
to complete the current face set and begin a new
You can also complete the set by clicking the middle mouse button.
4. Repeat this sequence for each set of faces that require a unique wall
thickness.
13-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Shell
Shell options
You can right-click the section, preview, axis vector, or handles to
quickly access many of the following options.
Option
Remove Faces, Then
Shell
Shell All Faces
Select Face
Description
Remove some faces of the body before shelling
is done.
Shell all faces of the body.
Select one or more faces from a body you are
going to shell. 1
Select Body
The first face selected sets the body to shell. 2
Select the body you want to shell. 3
Thickness
Specify a thickness for the shell walls.
(Thickness group)
Reverse Direction
Select Face
Drag the thickness handle, or type a value in
the on-screen input box or in the dialog box.
Change the direction of the thickness.
You can also right-click the thickness direction
cone head and choose Reverse Direction, or
double-click the direction cone head.
Select faces for a thickness set with a unique
thickness value for all faces in the set. 2
Complete the set by clicking Add New Set or by
clicking the middle mouse button.
Thickness n
(Alternate Thickness
group)
You can add as many face sets as the model
allows.
Specify an independent thickness value for the
currently selected thickness set in the List.
You can drag the face set handle, or type a value
in the on-screen input box or dialog box.
The Thickness n label changes to match
the currently selected Thickness set;
Thickness 1, Thickness 2, etc.
1. Appears only when the Type is Remove Faces, Then Shell.
2. Selection Intent for faces is available.
3. Appears only when the Type is Shell All Faces.
Essentials for NX Designers
13-5
13
Shell
Option
Add New Set
List
Description
Complete the current face set.
You can also complete the current face set by
clicking the middle mouse button.
Thickness sets appear in the list with their
name, value, and expression information.
To select a thickness set, click its on-screen
input box in the graphics window or click its
entry in the List.
13
Delete a thickness set in the list.
Resolve
Self-intersections
Using Patches
Tangent Edges
Tolerance
13-6
Essentials for NX Designers
You can also delete a thickness set by
right-clicking it in the list and choosing Delete or
by right-clicking its handle and choosing Delete.
When selected, NX repairs self-intersections
caused by offsetting surfaces in the body, by
approximating the face within the specified
Tolerance.
Use this option for complicated surfaces that
would fail due to self-intersections during shell
creation.
Extend Shelf Face at Tangent Edge — Allow the
creation of edge faces along smooth boundary
edges.
Extend Tangent Face — Prevent the creation of
edge faces along smooth boundary edges.
Enter a new tolerance value here to override
the modeling distance tolerance for the shell
operation.
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Shell
Selection Intent face rules
When a feature requires a collection of faces, Face Rule options are available.
The list displays the face selection rules that are applicable to the feature
you are creating.
Rule
Description
Single Face
Single-select one or more faces as a simple list of
objects without intent.
Tangent Faces
Select a single face that acts as the seed of a
collection of smoothly connected faces.
Adjacent Faces
Collect all faces that are immediately adjacent to
the single face you select.
Face and Adjacent
Faces
Collect the selected face and faces that are
immediately adjacent to the single face you select.
Feature Faces
Collect all faces produced by the feature
responsible for the face you select.
Specify a region of faces.
Region Faces
Select a single seed face, and then specify the
boundary faces.
Tangent Region
Faces
Select a seed face and then, optionally, one or
more boundary faces.
Body Faces
Collect all faces of the body containing the single
face you select
Essentials for NX Designers
13-7
13
Shell
Activities: Shell
In the Shell section, do the activities:
•
Create a shell
•
Create a shell with alternate thickness
13
13-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Shell
Summary: Shell
Use the Shell command to create a cavity inside, or a shell around an existing
solid body, based on a specified thickness.
In this lesson you:
•
Created a shell with a uniform thickness.
•
Created a shell and selected multiple faces to remove.
•
Created a shell and specified an alternate thickness for a face.
Essentials for NX Designers
13
13-9
13
Lesson
14 Associative copies
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Pattern Feature, Mirror Body and Feature Group
commands.
Objectives
14
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create a rectangular pattern of features.
•
Create a circular pattern of features.
•
Mirror a body.
Essentials for NX Designers
14-1
Associative copies
Pattern Feature
Use the Pattern Feature command to create patterns of features (linear,
circular, polygon, etc.) with various options for defining pattern boundaries,
orientation of instances, clocking and variance.
•
Linear
Polygon
Along
Circular
Spiral
General
Reference
•
For a Linear layout, you can specify a Symmetric pattern in one or both
directions. You can also specify to Stagger columns or rows.
•
For a Circular or Polygon layout, you can choose to radiate a pattern.
•
You can export pattern parameter values to a spreadsheet and make
positional edits that are propagated back to your pattern definition.
14
14-2
You can create pattern features using a variety of pattern layouts.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Associative copies
•
You can explicitly select individual instance points for clocking,
suppression and variance of pattern features.
•
You can control the orientation of a pattern.
14
Orientation same as input
Orientation follows pattern
(circular)
Where do I find it?
Application
Prerequisite
Modeling and Shape Studio
History mode
Toolbar
Menu
Feature→Pattern Feature
Insert→Associative Copy→Pattern Feature
Essentials for NX Designers
14-3
Associative copies
Pattern Feature methods
Simple
14
•
Simple design features such as
holes and extruded features are
supported.
•
One input feature per output
pattern.
•
Multi-body features are supported.
•
All features which support
copy-paste are supported.
•
Detailed features such as blends
and drafts are supported.
•
Each instance of the pattern is
fully evaluated.
•
Works with multiple input
features.
•
Multi-body features are supported.
•
You can reuse references to the
input feature and control which
references from the input features
are evaluated at each instance
location.
•
Advanced hole functions are
supported.
•
Sketch features are supported.
Variational
14-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Associative copies
Create a linear pattern of features in two directions
This example shows you how to
create a linear pattern of features in
two directions.
14
1. On the Feature toolbar, click Pattern Feature
.
2. Select features to pattern.
3. In the Pattern Definition group, from the Layout list, select Linear
Essentials for NX Designers
.
14-5
Associative copies
4. Select an edge to define Direction 1.
5. In the Direction 1 section:
14
•
From the Spacing list, choose Count and Span.
•
In the Count box, type 5.
•
In the Span Distance box, type 145.
6. In the Direction 2 section, select the Use Direction 2 check box.
7. Use Specify Vector to define Direction 2.
14-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Associative copies
8. In the Direction 2 section:
•
From the Spacing list, choose Count and Pitch.
•
In the Count box, type 3.
•
In the Pitch Distance box, type 55.
14
9. Choose another command or click OK to create the pattern.
Essentials for NX Designers
14-7
Associative copies
Create a circular pattern of concentric features
This example shows you how to
create a partial circular pattern of
features that are concentric.
14
1. On the Feature toolbar, click Pattern Feature
.
2. Select the features to pattern.
3. In the Pattern Definition group, from the Layout list, select Circular
.
4. Under Rotation Axis, click Specify Vector.
14-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Associative copies
5. Specify a vector of rotation.
14
6. Specify a point of rotation.
Essentials for NX Designers
14-9
Associative copies
7. Under Angular Direction:
•
From the Spacing list, choose Pitch and Span.
•
From the Define Pitch As list, choose Angle.
•
In the Pitch Angle box, type 30.
•
In the Span Angle box, type 270.
14
8. Under Radiate:
14-10
•
Select the Create Concentric Members check box.
•
Make sure the Include First Circle check box is selected.
•
From the Spacing list, choose Pitch and Span.
•
In the Pitch Distance box, type – 20.
•
In the Span Distance box, type – 50.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Associative copies
9. Choose another command or click OK to create the pattern.
14
Essentials for NX Designers
14-11
Associative copies
Activities: Associative copies – pattern features
In the Associative copies section, do the activities:
14
14-12
•
Create a linear pattern of features
•
Create a circular pattern of features
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Associative copies
Extract Geometry – Mirror Body
Use the Mirror Body command to model symmetrical parts.
•
When you mirror a body, the mirror feature is associative to the original
body. You cannot edit any parameters in the mirrored body.
•
You can specify a timestamp for the mirror feature so that any features
you later add to the original body will not be reflected in the mirrored body.
14
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Location in dialog
box
Feature→Extract Geometry
Insert→Associative Copy→Extract Geometry
Type list → Mirror Body
Essentials for NX Designers
14-13
Associative copies
Create a mirrored body
1. From the menu bar, choose Insert→Associative Copy→Extract Geometry.
2. In the Extract Geometry dialog box, from the Type list, select Mirror Body.
3. With Select Body highlighted, select a body to mirror.
4. Click Select Mirror Plane
and select a datum plane.
5. (Optional) In the Settings group, clear the Fix at Current Timestamp
check box if you want the mirrored body to reflect subsequent features
added to the parent body.
14
6. Click OK or Apply to create the mirrored body.
Edit a mirrored body
1. Right-click the mirrored body in the graphics window or in the Part
Navigator.
2. Choose Edit with Rollback from the shortcut menu
3. In the Mirror Body dialog box, edit the parent body, timestamp setting,
or the mirror plane.
14-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Associative copies
Mirror Body options
Parent Part
Available only during edit.
Work Part — Select a parent body from the work part.
Other Part — Select a parent body from another part.
The mirrored body then becomes a WAVE linked body.
Select Body
Lets you select a body in a part to mirror.
Reverse
Direction
Available only during edit.
Available only if you are mirroring a sheet body.
Reverses the surface normal of the mirrored body.
14
Select Plane
Select a datum plane through which to mirror a body.
Replacement
Assistant
Available only during edit and only if you select
geometry to replace the existing geometry.
Lets you select geometry to replace existing geometry.
WAVE
Information
This group is available only during edit and only when
the mirrored body is a WAVE linked body.
Parent Part displays the name of the parent part.
Object displays the name of the parent object.
Status displays the status of the WAVE link.
Fix at Current
Timestamp
Select this option to fix the feature timestamp of the
mirrored body.
When active, only changes made to the original body
prior to the timestamp are reflected in the mirrored
body. Changes made to the original body after the
timestamp are not reflected in the mirrored body.
When not selected, the mirrored body dynamically
changes its location in history. Changes made to the
original body are always reflected in the mirror body.
Essentials for NX Designers
14-15
Associative copies
Activities: Associative copies – mirror
In the Associative copies section, do the activity:
•
Mirror a solid body
14
14-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Associative copies
Summary: Associative copies
Use the Pattern Feature and Mirror Body commands to duplicate existing
features.
In this lesson you:
•
Created a two-direction Linear pattern of features.
•
Created a circular pattern of features.
•
Mirrored a body.
14
Essentials for NX Designers
14-17
14
Lesson
15 Edge operations
Purpose
This lesson introduces the edge operation commands to provide additional
definition to the edges of a model. These commands include Edge Blend
and Chamfer.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create edge blends.
•
Create chamfers.
15
Essentials for NX Designers
15-1
Edge operations
Edge Blend
Use the Edge Blend command to round sharp edges between faces.
This command operates like a ball that rolls along an edge, maintaining
contact with the faces that meet the edge.
The blending ball rolls on the inside of faces to round the edges, removing
material (1), and the outside of faces to fillet the edges, adding material (2).
15
Where do I find it?
15-2
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Graphics window
Feature→Edge Blend
Insert→Detail Feature→Edge Blend
Right-click edges→Blend
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Edge operations
Edge Blend dialog box
After you click Edge Blend a dialog box is displayed and you are prompted to
select a set of edges. You can type the radius in the Radius n box.
Radius n refers to Radius 1, Radius 2, Radius 3, and so on.
Use a Curve Rule to collect related edges or to speed up selection.
15
Essentials for NX Designers
15-3
Edge operations
Edge Blend preview
As you select edges, the preview is updated. If the preview fails, it means the
blend will probably also fail. You should see a warning window explaining
the problem.
Adjust the radius by dragging one of the radius drag handles (1) or by typing
the value in the dynamic input field (2).
15
Add New Set
A single blend feature may consist of one or more sets of edges. Each set
may have a different radius value.
Click Add New Set in the dialog box (or click the middle mouse button once)
to select another set of edges.
You may continue to define another edge set or complete the blend operation
by clicking OK.
15-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Edge operations
Activities: Edge operations — blends
In the Edge operations section, do the activities:
•
Blend the edges of a drill housing
•
Edit edge blends
15
Essentials for NX Designers
15-5
Edge operations
Chamfer
Use the Chamfer command to bevel the edges of one or more bodies.
Depending on the shape of the body, the chamfer bevels edges by subtracting
material (1) or adding material (2).
You can define the cross section of the chamfer by specifying:
15
•
One symmetric offset distance.
•
Two offset distances.
•
An offset distance and an angle.
Where do I find it?
15-6
Application
Modeling
Toolbar
Menu
Graphics window
Feature→Chamfer
Insert→Detail Feature→Chamfer
Right-click an edge of a body→Chamfer
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Edge operations
Create a Chamfer
1. On the Feature toolbar, click Chamfer
Feature→Chamfer.
, or choose Insert→Detail
2. Select one or more edges.
3. In the Offsets group, specify an option from the Cross Section list;
Symmetric, Asymmetric, or Offset and Angle.
4. In the dialog box, type offset values that correspond to the cross section
option.
5. (Optional) In the Settings group, specify an option from the Offset Method
list, Offset Edges along Faces, or Offset Faces and Trim.
6. (Optional) In the Preview group, select Preview to preview results, or
clear it to show only the drag handles.
15
7. (Optional) Use drag handles or on-screen input boxes to modify offsets.
8. (Optional) In the Offset group, click Reverse Direction to flip the chamfer.
9. Click OK or click the middle mouse button to create the chamfer.
Essentials for NX Designers
15-7
Edge operations
Chamfer options
You can change the Cross Section option or click Reverse Direction in
the dialog box, or, you can use the shortcut menu over a drag handle.
Edge
Select Edge
Select one or more edges from the same body, using
a Curve Rule.
Offsets
Symmetric — Create a simple chamfer, using an
single, positive offset from a selected edge along
both of its faces.
Cross Section
15
Distance
Distance 1
Distance 2
Angle
Reverse Direction
Asymmetric Create a chamfer using two positive
values for the edge offsets.
Offset and Angle — Create a chamfer whose offsets
are determined by one positive offset value and a
positive angle.
Type a distance value for the offset when the Cross
Section is Offset and Angle or Symmetric.
You can also drag the distance handle to specify the
value.
Type distance values when the Cross Section is
Asymmetric, or drag the handles.
Type an angle value for the angle when the Cross
Section is Offset and Angle.
You can also drag the angle handle to specify the
angle.
Move the offsets or the offset and angle from one
side of the chamfer edge to the other.
Not available when the cross section is symmetric.
15-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Edge operations
Activities: Edge operations — chamfers
In the Edge operations section, do the activity:
•
Create chamfers on a fitting for a porthole
15
Essentials for NX Designers
15-9
Edge operations
Projects: Shell, Associative Copies, Blends and Chamfers
In the Projects section, there are three projects to further detail the
design features by blending and adding chamfers. You will create feature
associations and shell bodies.
Tier 1
Pulley - part 5
Tier 2
15
Flywheel - part 5
Tank - part 5
15-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Edge operations
Summary: Edge operations
Use the Edge Blend and Chamfer commands to alter the edges of a solid body.
All of the blended edges or chamfered edges created in a single operation are
considered to be one feature.
In this lesson you:
•
Blended a single edge.
•
Blended edges using a Selection Intent rule.
•
Chamfered edges using different input options.
15
Essentials for NX Designers
15-11
15
Lesson
16 Introduction to Synchronous
Modeling
Purpose
This lesson introduces editing techniques using Synchronous Modeling.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Edit a model by moving faces.
•
Resize blends.
16
Essentials for NX Designers
16-1
Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
Synchronous Modeling
Synchronous Modeling commands are used to modify a model regardless of
its origins, associativity, or feature history.
The model you modify can be:
•
Imported from other CAD systems
•
Non-associative, with no features
•
A native NX model complete with features
By working directly with the model, the geometry is not rebuilt or converted.
With Synchronous Modeling, designers can use parametric features without
the limitations of a feature history.
Synchronous Modeling is primarily suited for use on models composed of
analytic faces types like plane, cylinder, cone, sphere, torus. This does not
necessarily mean “simple” parts, since models with many thousands of faces
are composed of these face types.
16
16-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
Move Face
Use the Move Face command to move a set of faces and automatically adjust
adjacent faces.
You can use linear, angular or circular transform methods to move the
selected faces.
Move Face is a useful design tool that facilitates easy design change during
the design process. It is also useful in downstream applications like Tooling,
Manufacturing, and Simulation, where you can directly make changes to the
model, regardless of feature history.
Some scenarios where you can use the Move Face command are:
•
To relocate a group of faces to a different position to meet design intent.
•
To relocate a series of faces in several components of an assembly. (All
components and assembly must be in History-Free mode.)
•
To change the bend angle of a sheet metal part that has no history.
•
To rotate a face or set of faces about a given axis and about a point. For
example, to change the angular position of a keyway slot.
•
To change the orientation of an entire solid body, irrespective of its history,
to a different orientation.
Essentials for NX Designers
16-3
16
Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
Where do I find it?
Application
Modeling, Shape Studio, Advanced Simulation, and
Manufacturing
Synchronous Modeling→Modify Face Drop-down
Toolbar
Menu
list→Move Face
Insert→Synchronous Modeling→Move Face
16
16-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
Move Face options
1 Select Face
Lets you select a face or faces to move.
2 Face Finder
Lets you select faces based on how their geometry
compares with the selected face.
3 Motion
Provides linear and angular transform methods for the
faces you select to move.
16
Essentials for NX Designers
16-5
Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
Resize Blend
Use the Resize Blend command to change the radii of blend faces regardless
of their feature history.
The Resize Blend command works with translated files and unparameterized
solids.
In this example, the red face in the body on the left is resized using Resize
Blend. The dependent blue face updates automatically.
Where do I find it?
Application
16
Toolbar
Menu
16-6
Essentials for NX Designers
Modeling, Shape Studio, Advanced Simulation, and
Manufacturing
Synchronous Modeling→Detail Feature Drop-down
list→Resize Blend
Insert→Synchronous Modeling→Detail
Feature→Resize Blend
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
Activities: Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
In the Synchronous Modeling section, do the activities:
•
Move faces using synchronous modeling
•
Resize blends using synchronous modeling
16
Essentials for NX Designers
16-7
Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
Summary: Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
Synchronous Modeling commands can be used to quickly edit a model that
has no feature history or that requires a change in the design intent which
was not anticipated when it was constructed.
In this lesson, you:
•
Edited models using Synchronous Modeling commands.
16
16-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Lesson
17 Introduction to Assemblies
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Assemblies application.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Set load options for an assembly.
•
Work with the Assembly Navigator.
17
Essentials for NX Designers
17-1
Introduction to Assemblies
Introduction to NX Assemblies
Use the NX Assemblies application to model assemblies of piece part files
and subassembly files.
The Assemblies commands are available in other applications, such as
Gateway, Modeling, Drafting, and Manufacturing.
When you use the Assemblies application, you can do the following:
•
Separate master geometry from downstream applications such as:
o
o
o
Drafting
Manufacturing
Analysis
•
Measure static clearances, distances, and angles between parts in the
assembly.
•
Design parts to fit in the available space.
•
Create assembly drawings, showing all or only selected components.
When the Assemblies application is available, you see the Assemblies toolbar
options. The availability of Assemblies options depends primarily on the
Role selected.
Essential with full menus
17
Advanced with full menus
17-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Assemblies
If the Assemblies options are not available, select Assemblies from the Start
list,
Where do I find it?
Toolbar
Menu
Application→Assemblies
Standard→Start→Assemblies
Assemblies is selected in the menu when the
application is active.
17
Essentials for NX Designers
17-3
Introduction to Assemblies
Assembly
An assembly is a part which contains component objects.
Component objects are pointers to standalone parts or subassemblies.
In this illustration, the toy laser gun is an assembly consisting of many
components.
Subassembly
A subassembly is an assembly used as a component within a higher level
assembly.
17
This illustration shows the subassembly of the integrated circuit board for
the toy laser gun.
17-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Assemblies
Component objects
A component object is a nongeometric pointer to the file that contains the
component geometry. After you define a component, the part file in which
you define it has a new component object. The component object allows the
component to be displayed in the assembly without duplicating any geometry.
Component objects store information about the component part, such as:
•
•
•
•
•
Layer.
Color.
Position data for the component relative to the assembly.
The path to the component part on the file system.
The reference set to display.
17
1. Top level assembly
2. Subassembly referenced by the top level assembly
3. Piece parts or standalone parts referenced by an assembly
4. Component objects in assembly files
Essentials for NX Designers
17-5
Introduction to Assemblies
Component Part Files
A component part is a part file which is referenced by a component object in
an assembly. Geometry stored in a component part is seen, but not copied,
in the assembly.
The terms piece part or stand alone part refers to a part file that is not itself
an assembly.
The ability to easily determine where a part file is used as a component
part file is one of the strengths of Teamcenter Integration for NX.
Load states
The load state of a part describes the amount of data that is brought into
computer memory from file storage.
There are three load states:
Fully loaded
All of the data in the file is loaded into memory. Use this load state with
small assemblies, or with a subset of large assembly components to edit
or create links to parametric data.
Partially loaded
Enough data is brought into memory to display the part. Parametric data
is not loaded into memory. Use this load state to open large assemblies
faster than when you fully open components, and to conserve computer
memory for those components that you are going to modify. You can
fully open partially loaded components at any time if you want to edit
their data.
17
Not loaded
The file is not loaded into memory at all. The assembly has information
about the position and the bounding box size of the unloaded parts.
Use this load state to manage very large assemblies, for which you can
manipulate only a relatively small amount of data at any one time. Fully
or partially load only those components of immediate interest, and leave
the rest unloaded.
17-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Assemblies
Scope group
The Scope group in the Assembly Load Options dialog box allows you to
control the assembly configuration and the load state of parts:
•
Load — Control which components are opened:
o
o
o
All Components — Load all components.
Structure Only — Load your assembly part, but no components.
As Saved — Load the same components that were open when the
assembly was last saved.
Re-evaluate Last Component Group — Load your assembly with the
component group used when the assembly was last saved.
o
Component groups are advanced functionality to let you
conditionally apply actions to all or part of the assembly
structure.
o
Specify Component Group — Select from a list of available component
groups.
•
Use Partial Loading — When selected, components will be partially
loaded unless the Load Interpart Data setting requires them to be fully
loaded. A partially loaded component will be fully displayed but the
underlying feature data is not loaded into system memory.
•
Use Lightweight Representations — Loads lightweight representations
for the components that have lightweight representations in the current
reference set. Use this with the Use Partial Loading assembly load option
for maximum performance and memory benefits.
•
Load Interpart Data — Find and load parents of interpart data, even if
the parts would be left unloaded by other rules.
17
Reference Sets
Use this area to specify a list of reference sets to be looked for, in order, when
an assembly is loaded. The first reference set found from the top of the list
reading downwards is the one that is loaded.
Think of a reference set as a subset of part geometry that you can load
in place of the entire part.
The Model reference set is meant to contain only a body that you wish
to place on a drawing.
Essentials for NX Designers
17-7
Introduction to Assemblies
Saved Load Options
You may save the current load options settings as your default settings.
Otherwise, any changes you make in the Assembly Load Options dialog box
apply only to your current NX session.
The Saved Load Options group contains options to control saved settings:
•
Save as Default — Save the current load options as your defaults in the
load_options.def file in your current directory.
•
Restore Default — Reset the load options to the values defined in the
load_options.def file in your current directory, if it exists, or to the system
defaults.
•
Save to File — Save the current load options settings to a load option
definition file whose name and location you define in the Save Load
Options File dialog box.
•
Open from File — Open the Restore Load Options File dialog box, from
which you can select a custom load option definitions file.
17
17-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Assemblies
Activities: Assemblies — assembly load options and the Assembly
Navigator
In the Introduction to Assemblies section, do the activities:
•
Assembly Load Options
•
Assembly Navigator
17
Essentials for NX Designers
17-9
Introduction to Assemblies
Select components
When you are using commands that require you to select components, you
can select them in the following ways:
•
Select the component in the graphics window.
•
Select the corresponding node in the Assembly Navigator.
•
Select the component name from a list, for certain commands.
•
Type the component name in the Class Selection dialog box, in the Other
Selection Methods group, in the Select by Name box.
Select components with QuickPick
Use the Quickpick list to easily select a component or object from a crowded
field of objects.
Once you position your cursor over a group of components the QuickPick
cursor displays
. Click once to display the QuickPick dialog box.
You can use the Components filter to list only components.
17
17-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Assemblies
Identify components
•
Select nodes for loaded and visible components in the Assembly Navigator
hierarchal tree to highlight the corresponding geometry in the graphics
window.
•
Move the cursor over invisible components to see a bounding box in the
graphics window.
Bounding boxes are shown only when the assembly preference
Preselect Invisible Nodes is selected.
If the node is packed, one random component is identified.
The following image shows how an invisible component looks when only the
bounding box is displayed. The image on the left is the loaded component and
the image on the right is the bounding box display.
17
Essentials for NX Designers
17-11
Introduction to Assemblies
Assembly Navigator display commands
Right-click a node in the Assembly Navigator that represents a component
to display component related display commands.
The shortcut menu commands you see depend on the node you right-click.
Not all available commands or options are shown in the following table.
Command
Description
The following commands are available when you right-click a component
node.
Available only for nodes with multiple
occurrences.
Pack
Replaces multiple occurrences of the
selected component with a single node.
The number of occurrences
represented by a packed node is
displayed on the node.
Available for packed nodes.
Unpack
17
17-12
Expands packed nodes to show all
occurrences.
Make Work Part
Specifies the part in which to create
objects and geometry.
Make Displayed Part
Switches the display between
currently loaded parts.
Display Parent
Changes the displayed part to a
selected parent of the node you
right-click.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Assemblies
Component
Opens the selected component,
according to the current assembly
load option settings.
Assembly
Opens the selected subassembly.
Open
Component Fully
Opens the selected component
with full loading regardless of the
Use Partial Loading setting in the
assembly load options.
Child Components
Opens components of the top level
assembly.
Part
Closes the
component part
corresponding to
the selected node.
Assembly
Closes the entire
subassembly
under the selected
node.
Close
17
Hide
Hides the selected component.
Show Only
Shows the selected component and
hides all other components.
Delete
Removes the selected component
object from the assembly, without
deleting the corresponding part file.
Essentials for NX Designers
17-13
Introduction to Assemblies
Not all available commands or options are shown in the following table.
The following commands are available:
•
•
In the Assembly Navigator, when you right-click the background.
On the Tools→Assembly Navigator menu.
Command
Expand All
Pack All
Unpack All
Description
Expands all collapsed nodes in the
Assembly Navigator so that every
component has a visible node.
Packs all components that currently
have multiple occurrences in the
assembly.
Unpacks all components that have
multiple occurrences.
17
17-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Assemblies
Activities: Assemblies — more navigator options
In the Introduction to Assemblies section, do the activity:
•
Additional work with the Assembly Navigator
17
Essentials for NX Designers
17-15
Introduction to Assemblies
Part revisions and saving assemblies
After you edit it, save the work part to keep the modifications.
Use File→Save or File→Save Work Part Only.
Save
•
If the work part is a standalone part, only that part is saved.
•
If the work part is an assembly or subassembly, all modified component
parts below it are also saved.
File→Save does not save higher level parts and assemblies if they are
modified.
File→Save All saves all modified parts in the session regardless
of which part is the work part, even parts that do not belong to
the displayed assembly.
Open parts for which you do not have write privileges will not be
saved.
You will get a warning about parts that cannot be saved due to
permissions.
Save Work Part Only
Use the Save Work Part Only command to save only the work part, even if it
is an assembly or subassembly with modified components.
17
Where do I find it?
Menu
17-16
Essentials for NX Designers
File→Save Work Part Only
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Assemblies
Summary: Assemblies
An assembly is a file which contains component objects. It is a collection of
pointers to piece parts and/or subassemblies.
Assemblies provides the ability to design in context.
In this lesson you:
•
Set Assembly Load Options.
•
Worked with the Assembly Navigator.
17
Essentials for NX Designers
17-17
17
Lesson
18 Adding and constraining
components
Purpose
This lesson introduces commands to add components to an assembly, move
components, and define associative relationships between components.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Add components to an assembly.
•
Move components.
•
Create assembly constraints.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-1
Adding and constraining components
General assembly concepts
There are two approaches to creating an assembly structure.
•
Top-down modeling — Create component parts at the assembly level.
•
Bottom-up modeling — Create individual models in isolation, then later
add them to assemblies.
You are not limited to one approach to build an assembly. For example, you
can initially work in a top-down fashion, then switch back and forth between
bottom-up and top-down modeling.
18
18-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Bottom-up assembly modeling
In bottom-up assembly modeling, you create piece parts and then later add
them to an assembly.
Use the Add Component
references an existing part.
command to create a new component that
The component is added to the work part. The work part can be:
•
The displayed part.
•
Any member of a displayed assembly.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-3
Adding and constraining components
Add Component
Use the Add Component command to add one or more component parts
to the work part.
If you add a part family template part, the Select Family Member dialog
box appears.
You can:
•
Add one or more instances of selected components in a single operation.
When you add multiple components at the same time, you may want
to use the Scatter option to prevent the components from being
positioned in the same location.
•
Select multiple parts to add in a single operation.
•
Repeat the add operation by selecting Repeat after Add from the Multiple
Add list.
•
Create component arrays of added components by selecting Array after
Add from the Multiple Add list.
Where do I find it?
Application
Assemblies
Toolbar
Menu
Assemblies→Add Component
Assemblies→Components→Add Component
18
18-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Add Component options
The following options are found on the Add Component dialog box.
•
•
Part group lets you select one or more parts to add to the work park. You
can select parts from the following locations.
o
Graphics window or Assembly Navigator
o
Loaded Parts list
o
Recent Parts list
Placement group sets the positioning method for added components along
with location options.
o
Absolute Origin places the components at absolute 0,0,0.
o
Select Origin places components at the selected location.
o
By Constraints opens the Assembly Constraints dialog box.
o
Move lets you move the component after an initial location is defined.
o
Scatter automatically places components in various locations to avoid
component overlap.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-5
Adding and constraining components
•
Replication group lets you use Multiple Add options to add more than
one instance.
•
Settings group sets component name attributes, desired reference set
and layer options.
18
18-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Component Preview window
In the Assembly Preferences dialog box, when the Preview Component on
Add check box is selected, the Component Preview window appears after you
select components to add to the assembly.
In the Component Preview staging view, you can:
•
Preview the component while you position it in the assembly.
•
Perform independent view operations in this window, such as zoom or
rotate.
•
Select geometry to define each assembly constraint.
18
The preview window closes at different times, depending on your selection
from the Positioning list in the Add Component dialog box.
•
By Constraints — The preview window closes after you specify assembly
constraints to position the component.
•
Absolute Origin, Select Origin, and Move — The preview window
closes after you select the component to add and click Apply in the Add
Component dialog box.
Essentials for NX Designers
18-7
Adding and constraining components
Activities: Adding components — create assembly
In the Adding and constraining components section, do the activity:
•
Create an assembly
18
18-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Move Component
Use the Move Component command to move and optionally copy a component
in an assembly. You can select and move multiple components.
You can move components dynamically, or you can create temporary
constraints to move the components into position.
By default, you can only move components that are immediate children
of the work part.
However, you can set a customer default to let you move components
anywhere in your assembly when you are in the Move Component dialog box,
regardless of what your work part is. In the Customer Defaults dialog box,
under Move Component, set Scope to Anywhere in Assembly.
To find a customer default, choose File→Utilities→Customer Defaults,
and click Find Default
.
This is useful, for example, if you want to simultaneously move a collection of
components that do not share the same assembly parent.
The use of the Anywhere in Assembly customer default can
significantly reduce the performance of the Move Component command
when the assembly structure of the displayed part has a large number
of assembly constraints.
Where do I find it?
Application
Assemblies
Toolbar
Menu
Assemblies→Move Component
Assemblies→Component Position→Move Component
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-9
Adding and constraining components
Move Component options
The following options are found on the Add Component dialog box.
•
Transform group specifies how the selected components move.
Motion provides the following options to move a component.
•
o
Dynamic use drag functions, the on-screen input box or the Point
dialog box.
o
By Constraints lets you add assembly constraints.
o
Distance moves the component a distance from a defined point in a
specified direction.
o
Point to Point moves the component from one point to another.
o
Delta XYZ enter a distance based on the displayed parts absolute or
the WCS location.
o
Angle moves the component about an axis point and vector direction a
specified angle.
o
Rotate By Three Points defines the pivot point, start and end points
in which to move the component.
o
CSYS to CSYS move the component from one CSYS to another.
o
Axis to Vector move the component between two defined vectors about
a pivot point.
Copy group lets you copy components that are moved.
18
18-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
•
Settings group lets you determine how moved components will behave
within arrangements, how many animations steps are used when the
component is moved, options for routing objects, and collision detection.
Collision Detection is only available when Copy is set to No Copy.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-11
Adding and constraining components
Assembly Constraints
Use the Assembly Constraints command to define positions of components
in the assembly. NX uses directionless positioning constraints, which means
that either component can move to solve the constraint.
You can use assembly constraints to:
•
Constrain components so they touch each other or align with each other.
The Touch Align constraint is the most commonly-used constraint.
•
Specify that a component is fixed in place. This is useful when you want
to control which components move when the software solves a constraint.
•
Bond two or more components together, so they move together.
•
Define a minimum distance between selected objects in components.
See Assembly constraint types for more information about the different types
of constraints and their uses.
You can also do the following.
18
•
Use the Constraint Navigator to analyze, organize, and work on assembly
constraints in your work part.
•
Convert mating conditions to assembly constraints. Assembly constraints
are usually faster to create and easier to use than mating conditions.
•
Create constraint groups in the Assembly Navigator or the Constraint
Navigator to organize the constraints in your assembly. A constraint
group associates a set of assembly constraints, and is displayed as a single
item in the navigator.
•
Delay the updating of assembly constraints until a convenient time.
When you are ready, you can activate the update.
Where do I find it?
Application
Assemblies
Toolbar
Assemblies→Assembly Constraints
Assemblies→Component Position→Assembly
Constraints
Menu
18-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Assembly constraints and the Assembly Navigator
The positional constraints of a component are reflected as symbols in the
Position column in the Assembly Navigator.
This list shows examples of the most used icons. Not all possible constraint
symbols are shown.
Fully constrained
Fixed
Partially constrained
Inconsistently constrained
Deferred constraints
Unconstrained
Suppressed
All six degrees of freedom are
constrained.
There are no remaining degrees of
freedom due to the fixed constraint.
The component has at least one
remaining degree of freedom.
Two or more constraints conflict.
There are constraints that reference
unloaded data, so the position may be
subject to change.
The component has all six degrees of
freedom and no position overrides.
All constraints for the component are
suppressed.
For Constraints node, one of the following icons may appear:
All Geometry Loaded
Some Geometry Unloaded
Essentials for NX Designers
18-13
18
Adding and constraining components
Assembly constraint types
Assembly constraint
type
Description
Angle
Defines an angle dimension between two objects.
Bond
“Welds” components together so they move as a
rigid body.
Center
Concentric
Distance
Fit
Bond constraints can only be applied
to components, or to components and
assembly-level geometry. Other objects are
not selectable.
Centers one or two objects between a pair of
objects, or centers a pair of objects along another
object.
Constrains circular or elliptical edges of two
components so the centers are coincident and the
planes of the edges are coplanar.
Specifies the minimum 3D distance between two
objects.
Brings together two cylindrical or conical faces
with equal radii within a linear tolerance of
0.1 mm for cylindrical faces, within an angular
tolerance of 1 degree for conical faces.
If the radii later become non-equal, the constraint
is invalid.
A fit constraint is useful for locating pins or bolts
in holes.
Fit constraints created during the releases
between NX 5.0 and NX 6.0.1 are listed as
Legacy Fit constraints. Fit constraints
created in NX 6.0.2 or later releases are
listed as Fit constraints.
18
Legacy fit and fit constraints differ only in
their behavior with cones or tori. A legacy
fit constraint makes the axes of two cones or
tori coincident. A fit constraint makes two
cones or tori fully coincident.
18-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Fix
Fixes a component at its current position.
Parallel
A fix constraint is useful when you need
an implied stationary object. With no fixed
node, the entire assembly has freedom to
move.
Defines the direction vectors of two objects as
parallel to each other.
Defines the direction vectors of two objects as
perpendicular to each other.
Constrains two components so they touch or align
with each other.
Perpendicular
Touch Align
Touch Align is the most commonly-used
constraint.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-15
Adding and constraining components
Create a Touch Align constraint
A touch align constraint constrains two components so they touch or align
with each other. This is the most common constraint.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Touch Align.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
4. Set Orientation to one of the following:
•
Prefer Touch presents a touch constraint when touch and align
constraints are both possible.
•
Touch constrains objects so their surface normals are in opposite
directions.
•
Align constrains objects so their surface normals are in the same
direction.
•
Infer Center/Axis specifies that when you select a cylindrical or conical
face, the face center or axis is for alignment.
5. Click Select Two Objects
the constraint.
(if necessary), and select two objects for
You can use the Point Constructor
to help you select objects.
6. If two solutions are possible, you can click Reverse Last Constraint
flip between the possible solutions.
to
7. Click OK or Apply.
18
18-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Create a Center constraint
A center constraint centers one or two objects between a pair of objects, or
centers a pair of objects along another object.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Center.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
4. Specify the Subtype:
•
1 to 2 centers the first selected object between the next two selected
objects.
•
2 to 1 centers two selected objects along the third selected object.
•
2 to 2 centers two selected objects between two other selected objects.
5. If Subtype is 1 to 2 or 2 to 1, set Axial Geometry to define what happens
if you select a cylindrical face or circular edge:
•
Use Geometry uses selected cylindrical faces for the constraint.
•
Infer Center/Axis uses the center or axis of the object.
(if necessary), and select the appropriate
6. Click Select Objects
number of objects as defined by the Subtype.
You can use the Point Constructor
to help you select objects.
7. If two solutions are possible, click Reverse Last Constraint
between the possible solutions.
to flip
18
8. Click OK or Apply.
Essentials for NX Designers
18-17
Adding and constraining components
Create a Concentric constraint
A concentric constraint constrains circular or elliptical edges of two
components so the centers are coincident and the planes of the edges are
coplanar. If the Accept Tolerance Curves assembly preference is selected,
objects that are nearly circles (within the distance tolerance) can also be
selected.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Concentric.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
•
Arrangements specifies whether you want the constraint to be applied
to other assembly arrangements.
•
Dynamic Positioning specifies that you want NX to solve the
constraints and move the components as you create each constraint.
•
Associative specifies that constraints are persistent after you exit the
Assembly Constraints dialog box.
•
Move Curves and Routing Objects
4. Click Select Two Objects
curves for the constraint.
(if necessary), and select two circular
5. If two solutions are possible, click Reverse Last Constraint
between the possible solutions.
to flip
6. Click OK or Apply when you finish adding constraints.
18
18-18
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Create a Distance constraint
A distance constraint specifies the minimum 3D distance between two objects.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Distance.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
•
Arrangements
•
Dynamic Positioning
•
Associative
•
Move Curves and Routing Objects
4. Click Select Two Objects
distance constraint.
(if necessary), and select two objects for the
5. If two solutions are possible, you can click Reverse Last Constraint
flip between the possible solutions.
to
If more than two solutions are possible, you can click Cycle Last
Constraint
to cycle through the possible solutions.
6. Click OK or Apply when you finish adding constraints.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-19
Adding and constraining components
Create a Fix constraint
A fix constraint fixes a component at its current position. This constraint is
useful when you want to ensure that the component stays in place while
other components are constrained to it.
A fix constraint is useful because the implied stationary object in the
Mate Component from-to relationship does not exist in the directionless
assembly constraints.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Fix.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
•
Arrangements
•
Dynamic Positioning
•
Associative
•
Move Curves and Routing Objects
4. Click Select Object
to fix.
(if necessary), and select the object you want
5. Click OK or Apply when you finish adding constraints.
18
18-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Create a Parallel constraint
A parallel constraint defines the direction vectors of two objects as parallel
to each other.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Parallel.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
•
Arrangements specifies whether you want the constraint to be applied
to other assembly arrangements.
•
Dynamic Positioning specifies that you want NX to solve the
constraints and move the components as you create each constraint.
•
Associative specifies that constraints are persistent after you exit the
Assembly Constraints dialog box.
•
Move Curves and Routing Objects
4. Click Select Two Objects
you want to be parallel.
(if necessary), and select two objects that
5. If two solutions are possible, you can click Reverse Last Constraint
flip between the possible solutions.
to
6. Click OK or Apply when you finish adding constraints.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-21
Adding and constraining components
Create a Perpendicular constraint
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Perpendicular.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
•
Arrangements — Specify whether you want the constraint to be
applied to other assembly arrangements.
•
Dynamic Positioning — Specify that you want NX to solve the
constraints and move the components as you create each constraint.
•
Associative — Specify that constraints are persistent after you close
the Assembly Constraints dialog box.
(if necessary), and select two objects that
4. Click Select Two Objects
you want to be perpendicular.
5. If two solutions are possible, you can click Reverse Last Constraint
flip between the possible solutions.
to
6. Click OK or Apply when you finish adding constraints.
18
18-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Create a Fit constraint
A fit constraint brings together two cylindrical faces with equal radii. This
constraint is useful for locating pins or bolts in holes. If the radii later become
non-equal, the constraint is invalid.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Fit.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
•
Arrangements
•
Dynamic Positioning
•
Associative
•
Move Curves and Routing Objects
4. Click Select Two Objects
(if necessary), and select two pieces of
geometry that are the same size.
You cannot apply a Fit constraint to symbolic-threaded geometry,
but you can apply other types of constraints. For example, you can
constrain a symbolic-threaded bolt to a symbolic-threaded hole by
applying a Touch/Align constraint to their centerlines.
The objects are fitted together.
5. If two solutions are possible, you can click Reverse Last Constraint
flip between the possible solutions.
to
18
6. Click OK or Apply when you finish adding constraints.
Essentials for NX Designers
18-23
Adding and constraining components
Create a Bond constraint
A bond constraint “welds” components together so they move as a rigid body.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Bond.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
•
Arrangements
•
Dynamic Positioning
•
Associative
•
Move Curves and Routing Objects
4. Click Select Objects
to bond.
(if necessary), and select two or more objects
Bond constraints can only be applied to components, or to
components and assembly-level geometry. Other objects are not
selectable.
5. Click Create Constraint when you are ready to create the constraint.
6. Click OK or Apply when you finish adding constraints.
18
18-24
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Create an Angle constraint
An angle constraint defines an angle dimension between two objects.
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Constraints
.
2. In the Assembly Constraints dialog box, set Type to Angle.
3. Check the Settings and modify them if you do not want to use their
defaults:
•
Arrangements
•
Dynamic Positioning
•
Associative
•
Move Curves and Routing Objects
4. Specify the angle’s Subtype:
•
3D Angle measures the angle constraint between two objects without
a defined axis of rotation.
•
Orient Angle measures the angle constraint between two objects,
using a selected axis of rotation.
5. Select the objects for the angle constraint as follows:
option appears.
•
If Subtype is 3D Angle, the Select Two Objects
Select two objects for the angle constraint.
•
option
If Subtype is Orient Angle, the Select Three Objects
appears. Select an axis as the first object, and then select two objects
for the angle constraint.
6. If two solutions are possible, click Reverse Last Constraint
between the possible solutions.
to flip
7. Click OK or Apply when you finish adding constraints.
Essentials for NX Designers
18-25
18
Adding and constraining components
Constraint Navigator
Use the Constraint Navigator to analyze, organize, and work on assembly
constraints in your work part. You can:
•
Find and work on constraints.
•
Resolve constraint issues.
You can analyze the constraints in different ways, by using grouping modes
to group the navigator tree nodes.
The Group by Constraints mode helps you check the status of the constraints
in your assembly.
Work Part
Align (GKWHEELASSY, GKAXLE)
GKaxle
GKwheelassy
Center (GKAXLE,GK_FRAME)
Fix (GK_FRAME)
The Group by Components mode helps you see which constraints are used
to position each component.
Work Part
GKaxle
Touch (GKAXLE, GKWHEELASSY)
GKaxle
GKwheelassy
Parallel (GKWHEELASSY,GKAXLE)
The Constraint Navigator is complementary to the Assembly Navigator.
•
You use the Assembly Navigator to explore components and the assembly
structure. Information about assembly constraints is provided, but the
information is mostly in the context of the components. Many columns in
this navigator are empty for constraint nodes.
•
You use the Constraint Navigator to explore assembly constraints and
how they affect components and the assembly structure. Information
about components is provided, but the information is mostly in the context
of the assembly constraints. Many columns in this navigator are empty
for component nodes.
18
Most shortcut menu commands that are available in the Assembly Navigator
for component and constraint nodes are also available in the Constraint
Navigator. The Pack and Unpack commands are not available because they
are not useful in the Constraint Navigator.
18-26
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
You can click a column heading to sort the navigator information by that title.
For example, if you want to see which constraints were most recently modified,
you can switch to the Group by Constraints mode and click the Modification
column title until the most recently-modified constraint is at the top.
Where do I find it?
Resource bar
Constraint Navigator
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-27
Adding and constraining components
Constraint Navigator grouping modes
You can analyze the constraints in different ways by using grouping modes to
group the Constraint Navigator tree nodes.
Group by Constraints
Use this mode when you want to list all the assembly constraints in your work
part. The components positioned by an assembly constraint are displayed
as children of the constraint node.
Work Part
Align (GKWHEELASSY, GKAXLE)
GKaxle
GKwheelassy
Center (GKAXLE,GK_FRAME)
Fix (GK_FRAME)
Group by Constraint Status
Use this mode when you want to group assembly constraints into folders
according to their constraint status:
•
Status = Error
•
Status = Warning
•
Status = Info
•
Status = OK
Group by Inherited
Use this mode when you want to distinguish between the following types of
constraints:
18
18-28
•
Constraints that are created in the work part
•
Constraints that are inherited from a lower-level assembly because of
positioning overrides.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Group by Components
Use this mode when you want to group the assembly constraints according to
the components they affect.
Work Part
GKaxle
Touch (GKAXLE, GKWHEELASSY)
GKaxle
GKwheelassy
Parallel (GKWHEELASSY,GKAXLE)
Under the top-level work part node, the Constraint Navigator lists all the
components in your work part.
You can expand a component node to see which assembly constraints affect
that component.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-29
Adding and constraining components
Group by Component Status
Use this mode when you want to group each component into a folder that
describes its status in regards to constraints.
Status =
Inconsistently
Constrained
The last time NX attempted to solve the assembly
constraints in this component, one or more assembly
constraints were inconsistent. Therefore, a position could
not be found for this component.
Status =
Unconstrained
The component has no assembly constraints.
Status = Fully
Constrained
The component is positioned with no degrees of freedom.
Status = Partially
Constrained
The component is positioned with one or more degrees of
freedom.
Status = Fixed
The component is fixed explicitly. For example, this folder
includes components to which you applied a Fix assembly
constraint.
Status =
Constraints
Ignored in
Arrangements
Although the component is constrained, the assembly
constraints are ignored in the current arrangement.
Status =
Constraints
Suppressed
Although the component is constrained, all of its assembly
constraints are currently suppressed.
Status =
Unloaded
Geometry
Although NX knows that the component contains at
least one assembly constraint, the constraint status
cannot be determined. One or more of the constraints
reference unloaded geometry, and no cached status is
available because of model changes that occurred after
the geometry was unloaded.
Status = Closed
Components
The component is closed, and therefore its constraint
status cannot be determined. However, you can use
the Constraint Navigator to examine the assembly
constraints that position the component, which is useful
if, for example, you want to load related geometry.
18
18-30
Essentials for NX Designers
If at least one assembly constraint referencing the
component is unsuppressed, the component is in a
different folder.
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Group by Component level
Use this mode when you want to distinguish between the following types of
components:
•
Components that are immediate children of the work part.
•
Components from within subassemblies that are positioned in the work
part only because they have a positioning override in the work part.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-31
Adding and constraining components
Show Degrees of Freedom
Use the Show Degrees of Freedom command to temporarily display the
degrees of freedom for a selected component. Degrees-of-freedom arrows
appear in the graphics window, and the Status line shows the number of
rotational and translational degrees of freedom that exist in the component.
You can find degrees of freedom on components that are loaded and
unsuppressed.
If geometry in other components needs to be loaded to find the degrees of
freedom, you receive a message asking if you want to load the geometry.
When the Show Degrees of Freedom command calculates the degrees
of freedom for the selected component, it assumes that the surrounding
components are fixed. If your component has not been sufficiently constrained
to its environment, you may be able to move the component in more directions
than calculated by the degrees of freedom. For example, if your component is
constrained in one direction to another component that can still move back
and forth in that direction, your component moves when the other component
moves.
18
Where do I find it?
Application
Assemblies
Assemblies→Component Position Drop-down
Toolbar
list→Show Degrees of Freedom
Assemblies→Component Position→Show Degrees
of Freedom
Right-click a component→Show Degrees of Freedom
Menu
Graphics window
18-32
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Assembly
Navigator
Right-click a component node→Show Degrees of
Freedom
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-33
Adding and constraining components
Activities: Adding and constraining components — constrain
In the Adding and constraining components section, do the following activity:
•
Constrain and move components
18
18-34
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Part family members in assemblies
Using part members of part families is an efficient way to ensure quality and
standardization of component parts in an assembly.
When you add a part family template part to an assembly as a component,
the Choose Family Member dialog box appears.
You can select the member of the part
family as follows:
1. Select the part name from the
Matching Members list box.
2. Type the name of the part in the
Part Name box.
3. Select attributes and define
Criteria to filter part family
members and determine parts
that meet your requirements.
The Matching Members list box lists family members that meet the Criteria.
As the list of matches becomes smaller, you can select a member to add, or
continue to narrow the criteria for candidates.
If the criteria specify a member of the family that does not yet exist, NX
creates a new member and adds it to the assembly.
Essentials for NX Designers
18-35
18
Adding and constraining components
Part family terminology
Part families use terminology not typically seen in other applications of NX.
Template part
Family table
Family member
Part Family
An NX part file constructed in such a
way that a family of parts can be built
based on it.
A table created from the template
part in the NX spreadsheet, which
describes the various attributes of the
template part that you can change
when you create a family member.
A read-only part file created from, and
associated with, a template part and
family table.
The template part, the family table,
and the family member parts.
18
18-36
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Activities: Family of parts
In the Adding and constraining components section, do the activity:
•
Add part family members to an assembly
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-37
Adding and constraining components
Projects: Adding and constraining components
In the Projects section, there are two assembly projects to practice adding and
constraining components to an assembly.
Tier 1
Cylinder Head
subassembly
Tier 2
Compressor
assembly
18
18-38
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Adding and constraining components
Summary: Adding and constraining components
When you add components to an assembly, you reference other part files
or subassemblies.
You can move components or establish constraints to define the locations of
components.
In this lesson you:
•
Added components to an assembly.
•
Moved components.
•
Defined assembly constraints.
18
Essentials for NX Designers
18-39
18
Lesson
19 Introduction to Drafting
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Drafting application and the master model concept.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Create a non-master file that references a master model.
•
Open, create, and delete drawing sheets.
•
Add and edit views on drawing sheets.
•
Create dimensions.
•
Create notes on a drawing sheet.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-1
Introduction to Drafting
Drafting application overview
The Drafting application allows you to produce and maintain industry
standard engineering drawings directly from the 3D model or assembly part.
Drawings created in the Drafting application are fully associative to the
model. Any changes made to the model are automatically reflected in the
drawing.
Some of the highlights of the Drafting application include:
•
A comprehensive set of view creation tools that support advanced
rendering, placement, associative, and update requirements for all view
types.
•
Fully associative drafting annotation that update when the model
updates.
•
Controls for drawing updates and large assembly drawings which enhance
user productivity.
•
Support for major national and international drafting standards,
including ANSI/ASME, ISO, DIN and JIS.
•
Support for both in-part and concurrent drawing creation in 3D drafting
processes.
o
Choose to save the 2D drafting details directly within the part itself,
or in a separate part that is fully associated to the master model.
o
The support for concurrent engineering practices enables the drafter
to make drawings while the designer concurrently works on the model.
In NX, the term drawing sheet is used to define a collection of views. You
can think of each drawing sheet as a separate page in the drawing file. One
drawing file can contain many drawing sheets.
19
19-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
The 3D drafting process in NX
The following illustrates the general process for creating a drawing from an
existing 3D model This overview is not intended to give a detailed description
of specific functions or operations.
Set your drafting standard and drawing preferences
Before creating a drawing, it is recommended that you set the drafting
standard, drafting view preferences, and annotation preferences for the new
drawing. Once set, all views and annotations will be consistently created with
appropriate visual characteristics and symbology.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-3
Introduction to Drafting
Create a new drawing
The first step in creating a drawing is to make a new drawing sheet either
directly within the current work part, or by creating a non-master drawing
part that contains the model geometry as a component.
Add views
NX enables to you create a single view or multiple views at the same time.
All views are derived directly from your model, and can be used to create
other views, such as section and detail views. The base view determines the
orthographic space and view alignment for all projected views.
19
19-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Add annotation
Once you have placed the views on your drawing, you are ready to add
annotations.
Annotations such as dimensions and symbols are associated with the
geometry in the views. If a view is moved the associated annotations move
with the view. If the model is edited, the dimensions and symbols update
to reflect the change.
You may also choose to add notes, labels, and in the case of assembly
drawings, parts lists to your drawing
A completed drawing can be plotted directly from NX, or the part containing
the drawing can be used directly by manufacturing to fabricate the part.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-5
Introduction to Drafting
The Drafting interface
In addition to standard tools and selection toolbars, the Drafting user
interface contains the following unique features:
Drawing sheet boundary
View boundary
Drafting toolbars
Drawing node on the Part Navigator
Drawing sheet name
19
Sketch Tools toolbar
19-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Master model concept
You apply the master model concept by creating an assembly, or non-master
part, with exactly one component part. The component part is the master
model. Edits to the master model are updated in the non-master part.
Part is added to the drawing file as a component
The master model concept allows multiple design processes to access the
same geometry during development. Benefits of this include:
•
It promotes concurrent engineering. You can begin downstream
applications such as drafting, manufacturing, and analysis during
geometry construction.
•
The downstream users need not have write access to the geometry. This
prevents accidental modifications.
Drafting
Assembly
Master Model
Analysis
19
N/C
Each application uses a separate assembly part. When the master model is
revised, the other applications automatically update with minimal or no
associativity loss.
Essentials for NX Designers
19-7
Introduction to Drafting
You can maintain the design intent of the various design applications by
restricting write permission on the master model.
19
19-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Create a new master model drawing
This example shows how to create a non-master drawing from a master part.
1. Choose File→Open, and select the master model part or assembly.
2. Select File→New.
3. Click the Drawing tab.
4. On the Drawing page, from the Relationship list, make sure Reference
Existing Part is selected.
5. From the Templates list, select an appropriate drawing template.
When Units is set to millimeters or inches, unit-specific templates
will display. Make sure to select a template that has the same units
as the current part.
6. (Optional) In the Name box, type a name.
7. (Optional) Choose a new folder location by clicking the Browse button
next to the Folder box.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-9
Introduction to Drafting
8. Click OK to create the new drawing part.
In this example, we created an E sized template and added views.
When you create a drawing this way, by default the template will set
all of your drafting preferences to those contained in the template.
9. Click the Assembly Navigator
tab in the Resource bar.
Note that you are now working in an assembly file and the original part
file has been added as a component.
Descriptive Part Name
Sections
block_dwg1
block
Although this is an assembly of the original part, all Drafting commands
and operations perform in the same way as they do in the original part.
19
19-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Sheet
Use the Sheet command to:
•
Create a new drawing in your work part, if no drawing exists in the part.
Use the File→New command and select a template from the Drawing
tab if you want to create and save the drawing in a separate part.
•
Create a new sheet if a drawing already exists in the part.
•
Edit an existing sheet.
From the Sheet command you can:
•
Create drawing sheets from a template.
•
Create custom sized sheets.
•
Set the units and projection angle for standard sheet sizes.
•
Set the height, width, units, and projection angle for custom sheet sizes.
•
Specify the size, scale, projection angle, units, along with the name,
number, and revision of a new drawing sheet.
•
Edit the size, scale, projection angle, units, name, number, and revision of
an existing drawing sheet.
You can change the projection angle only if there are no projected
views on the drawing sheet.
Where do I find it?
To create a new sheet
Application
Drafting
Toolbar
Menu
Part Navigator
Drawing→New Sheet
Insert→Sheet
Right-click the Drawing node→Insert Sheet
Essentials for NX Designers
19
19-11
Introduction to Drafting
To edit an existing sheet
Application
Drafting
Toolbar
Menu
Shortcut menu
Part Navigator
Drafting Edit→Edit Sheet
Edit→Sheet
Right-click the drawing border → Edit Sheet
Right-click the Sheet node→Edit Sheet
Create a new drawing sheet
1. On the Drawing toolbar, click New Sheet
.
2. In the Sheet dialog box, define the drawing sheet size, scale, name, units
of measure and projection angle.
3. Choose OK.
Open a drawing sheet
Do one of the following:
•
In the Part Navigator, double click the drawing sheet node.
•
In the Part Navigator, right-click the drawing sheet node and choose Open.
•
On the Drawing toolbar, click Open Sheet
.
19
19-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Edit a drawing sheet
Do one of the following:
•
In the Part Navigator, right-click the drawing sheet and choose Edit Sheet.
•
Right-click the view border of a drawing sheet and choose Edit Sheet.
•
On the Drafting Edit toolbar, click Edit Sheet
•
From the menu, choose Edit→Sheet.
You can change the projection angle only if no projected views exist on
the drawing sheet.
You can edit the drawing sheet to a larger or smaller size. If you
edit the drawing sheet to a size so small that a member view falls
entirely outside the boundary of the drawing sheet, you will get an
error message.
If you need to edit the drawing sheet to a smaller size, but cannot due to
the current position of the views, move the views closer to the drawing
sheet’s origin at the lower left corner of the sheet.
Delete a drawing sheet
Do one of the following:
•
Right-click the border of a drawing sheet and choose Delete.
•
In the Part Navigator, right-click the drawing sheet node and choose
Delete.
•
Choose Edit → Delete, then select the current drawing sheet border, then
click OK.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-13
Introduction to Drafting
Change drawing display to monochrome
The Monochrome Display option displays a drawing sheet in a single color.
1. Choose Preferences→Visualization.
2. Click the Color Settings tab.
3. In the Drawing Part Settings section, select the Monochrome Display
check box.
The default colors are black and gray. You can specify any line or
background color
In the Part Navigator, right-click the drawing node and choose
Monochrome.
Monochrome will be applied to all drawing sheets in the part.
In the Visualization Preferences dialog box, on the Line page, use the
Show Widths option to display of line widths and make the display
closely resemble a plotter output.
19
19-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Activities: Drafting – Edit a master model, Create drawings
In the Introduction to Drafting section, do the activities:
•
(Optional) Edit parameters of a master model.
•
Create a new non-master drawing
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-15
Introduction to Drafting
•
Open and edit drawings
19
19-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Drafting View Style and View Preferences
The dialog box is used to create or modify the visual appearance of a view,
as well as control the preference settings for the style options associated
with all view types.
•
The dialog box is called the View Style dialog box if you are creating or
modifying a specific view’s appearance.
•
It is called the View Preferences dialog box if you are setting the global
preferences for all view types.
The title of the dialog box, the tabs displayed in the dialog box, and the
options displayed on the different tabs of the dialog box, depend on whether
you are setting the style of a view or setting the preference for all views.
From this dialog box you can:
•
Control visual properties of the view such as how hidden lines, visible
lines, virtual intersections, and smooth edges are rendered, and whether
the view is displayed as a shaded or wireframe image.
•
Set the perspective, angle, and scale of the view.
•
Control the visibility of the view annotation such as the view label, scale
label, and centerline symbols.
•
Set the display characteristics for tracelines and thread representations
in the view.
•
Control the appearance of a section view, including the display of
foreground, background, and crosshatch elements.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-17
Introduction to Drafting
Where do I find it?
To open the View Style dialog box:
Application
Drafting
Toolbar
Drafting Edit→ Edit Style
, then select one or more
views from the drawing sheet
Highlight the view border, press and hold the right
Radial Toolbar
Menu
Graphics window
Part Navigator
mouse button →Style
Edit→Style then select one or more views from the
drawing sheet or Part Navigator
Double–click a view boundary
Right–click one or more view boundaries →Style
Right–click a view node →Style
To open the View Preferences dialog box
Application
Drafting
Toolbar
Menu
Drawing→View Preferences
Preferences→View
19
19-18
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Hidden Lines tab
The Hidden Lines tab in the View Style and View Preferences dialog box
provides options for controlling the way edges and curves, hidden by geometry
based on the view orientation, are displayed.
Any view created from an existing view, known as the parent view, will
automatically inherit the parent view’s hidden line settings, regardless
of how the Hidden Line options in the View Style or View Preferences
dialog boxes are set. Once the view is created, however, you can change
it’s hidden line display using the View Style dialog box.
Hidden edges and curves are
invisible
Hidden edges and curves are
displayed with specific color and
font
All hidden edges and curves are displayed
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-19
Introduction to Drafting
Smooth Edges
Smooth edges are those whose adjacent faces have the same surface tangent
at the edge where they meet.
On the Smooth Edges page, select the Smooth Edges check box to use the
color, font, and width settings to specify the appearance of smooth edges.
Use the End Gaps option to control the display of visible gaps at the ends of
smooth edges. The length of the gap is in drawing units and is determined by
the value set in the End Gaps box.
End Gaps not selected
End Gaps selected
19
19-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
View Creation Wizard
The View Creation Wizard automates the process of adding one or more
drafting views to a drawing sheet.
The wizard guides you through the process of:
•
Selecting a currently loaded, recently loaded, or unloaded part or
assembly to be included in the views.
•
Specifying the preview style and view style.
•
Optimizing view style options for large assembly views.
•
Inheriting PMI data from the model.
•
Selecting assembly arrangements.
•
Specifying a custom view orientation for the parent view.
•
Generating a multi-view layout.
•
Placing the view layout on the drawing sheet.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-21
Introduction to Drafting
From the parent view, you can select up to five standard orthographic view
projections. The projection angle of the views is derived from the orientation
of the parent view and the drawing’s projection angle.
You can also include an isometric or trimetric view to the layout.
Where do I find it?
Application
Drafting
Drawing→Add View Drop-down list→View Creation
Wizard
Toolbar
Menu
Drawing→View Creation Wizard
Insert→View→View Creation Wizard
Sheet dialog box:
Location in dialog
box
Settings group→under Automatically Start View
Creation→View Creation Wizard
19
19-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
View Creation Wizard window
1. Task Navigator – The Task Navigator lists the individual steps you take
to create a view layout.
Part – Lets you select a part or assembly to appear in the views.
Options – Provides you with a set of view style options to apply to
the views.
Orientation – Lets you specify the parent view orientation.
Layout – Lets you select and position the views to be added to the
drawing sheet.
2. Hide Task Navigator/Show Task Navigator – Hides the Task Navigator
in the View Creation Wizard
3. Task page – Each page in the View Creation Wizard displays a set of
commands and options to build your view layout.
4. Navigation buttons – Back, Next, Finish, and Cancel buttons navigate
you through the pages of the View Creation Wizard.
Essentials for NX Designers
19-23
19
Introduction to Drafting
Create a multi-view layout using the View Creation Wizard
This example shows you how to create a four view layout with the following
views:
1. In the Drafting application, create a new drawing sheet, or open an
existing drawing sheet.
If you are creating the first drawing sheet in the part, you can
launch the View Creation Wizard by selecting the Automatically
Start View Creation option on the Sheet dialog box. Make sure the
View Creation Wizard is also selected.
2. If necessary, on the Drawing toolbar, click View Creation Wizard
choose Insert→View→View Creation Wizard.
, or
3. In the Part page, select a loaded part, a recently opened part, or click
Open
to browse for a part to include in your views.
4. In the Task Navigator, select Options, or click Next to advance to the
Options page.
19
19-24
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
5. Select the display options for your views.
For this example, the following options are selected:
View Boundary = Manual
Auto-Scale to Fit
Process Hidden Lines
Show Centerlines
Show Silhouettes
Preview Style = Hidden Wireframe
6. In the Task Navigator, select Orientation, or click Next to advance to the
Orientation page.
7. From the Model Views list, select Front.
8. In the Task Navigator, select Layout, or click Next to advance to the
Layout page.
The parent view you selected in the Orientation step (Front), is currently
selected in the Layout step.
19
A preview of the parent view also appears on the drawing sheet.
Essentials for NX Designers
19-25
Introduction to Drafting
9. Click the Right, Top, and Trimetric buttons.
Previews of the other views appear on the drawing sheet. The projected
views align themselves orthographically with the parent view.
To remove a view from the layout, click the button to deselect it.
10. Under Placement, select either Automatic or Manual from the Option list.
11. (Optional) Under Margins, specify the minimum distance between borders
of adjacent views, as well as the minimum distance between the view
borders and the edges of the drawing sheet.
12. Click Finish.
19
19-26
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Base views
Use the Base command to add any standard modeling or custom view saved
in a part to a drawing sheet. A single drawing sheet may contain one or more
base views. From base views, you can create associated child views such as
Projected, Section, and Detail views.
The Base command provides options that enable you to:
•
Add any view from the master model part, the current part, or another
loaded part.
•
Specify the position and orientation of a view on the drawing.
•
Set the scale and style of the view.
•
Control the appearance of components in views on assembly drawings.
Exploded views can only be added as base views if the exploded view
resides in the part that contains the drawing. See Exploded Views in
Drafting for additional information.
Where do I find it?
Application
Drafting
Drawing → Base View
Toolbar
Menu
Shortcut Menu
Part Navigator
Drawing → Add View Drop-down list→Base View
Insert→View→Base
Right–click a drawing sheet border→Add Base View
Right–click a sheet node→Add Base View
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-27
Introduction to Drafting
Base View options
1. Part
Add a view from a part that you
specify
2. Model View to Use
Select the base view type from a
list. Select NX defined views or
custom views.
3. Orient View Tool
Define a custom orientation for a
view such as perpendicular to a
model face.
4. Scale
Select from a list of several preset
scales, enter a custom scale, or
define the scale by an expression.
5. View Style
Opens the View Style dialog box.
Settings you make apply to the
view you are adding.
19
19-28
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Create a Base view
1. Choose Start→Drafting.
2. On the Drawing toolbar, click Base View
Insert→View→Base.
, or choose
3. In the graphics window, move your cursor to the desired location and
right-click to open the shortcut menu.
4. Select Model View to Use→Right from the list.
5. Right-click again and select View Label.
6. Click in the graphics window to place your view.
7. Click the middle mouse button to dismiss the Base View dialog box.
The right model view is displayed with a label below the view.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-29
Introduction to Drafting
Projected views
You can project views from an existing base, drawing, orthographic, or
auxiliary view. NX automatically infers orthographic and auxiliary alignment
as you move the cursor in a circular motion about the parent view’s center.
The Automatically Start Projected View Command option on the
General tab of the Preferences→Drafting dialog box controls the
automatic start up of the projected view command.
The system automatically infers:
•
A hinge line to use as a reference to rotate the view into orthographic
space.
•
A vector direction that is perpendicular to the hinge line. The arrow
indicates the projection direction from the parent view.
You can manually define the hinge line and also reverse the projection
direction before you place the view.
Where do I find it?
Application
Drafting
Drawing → Projected View
Drawing → Add View Drop-down list→Projected View
Toolbar
Menu
Shortcut Menu
Part Navigator
Insert→View→Projected
Right–click a view border→Add Projected View
Right–click a view node→Add Projected View
19
19-30
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Projection lines
When you move the cursor while adding a projected view you see projection
lines. You can place the view at any angle from the base view. You can:
•
Place the view manually. The angle snaps to 45° increments.
•
Define a hinge line.
•
Select a planar face and project perpendicular to it.
Preview
As you move the cursor the preview style can be:
•
Border
•
Wireframe
•
Hidden Wireframe
•
Shaded Image
To select a preview option, right-click before you place the view and
choose Preview Style.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-31
Introduction to Drafting
Projected View options
(1) Parent View
Select a different base view to use as the parent
view.
(2) Vector Option
Infer a hinge line or explicitly define a fixed
hinge line.
(3) Reverse Projected Direction
Reverse the direction of the projected view.
(4) Associative
Make the projected view associated to the
defined hinge line.
(5) Placement
Align the projected view horizontally, vertically,
perpendicular to the hinge line, or infer the
placement based on the cursor location.
(6) Move View
Move an existing view without interrupting the
interaction to place a projected view.
(7) View Style
Opens the View Style dialog box.
19
19-32
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Edit the style of an existing view
There are several ways to change the style of an existing view.
•
Double-click the view border.
•
Right-click the view border and choose Style.
•
In the Part Navigator, double-click a drawing view node.
•
In the Part Navigator, right-click a drawing view node and choose Style.
•
Choose Edit→Style.
Drag views on a drawing
1. (Optional) Select one or more views to move.
2. Hold the cursor over the border of a view (a selected view, if there are more
than one) until it changes to drag mode
.
3. Drag the view as required.
As you move a view relative to others, alignment lines appear. When
you place a view with alignment lines visible it automatically snaps to
an aligned position.
Delete views on a drawing
There are several ways to remove a view from a drawing sheet.
•
Right-click the view border and choose Delete.
•
In the Part Navigator, right-click the view to be removed and choose
Delete.
•
Choose Delete
•
Choose Edit→Delete and select the view.
19
and select the view.
Once a view is removed from a drawing sheet, all drafting objects or view
modifications associated to that view are deleted.
Essentials for NX Designers
19-33
Introduction to Drafting
Activities: Drafting — add views
In the Introduction to drafting section, do the activity:
•
The View Creation Wizard
•
Add views to a drawing
19
19-34
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Dimensions
The Drafting application supports ANSI, ASME, ISO and JIS standard
dimension types, including Baseline, Chain, and Ordinate dimensions.
•
NX uses an intelligent inference algorithm to anticipate and create
dimensions based on the objects you select.
•
You can also choose to create specific dimension types using the
Dimension toolbar, or from the Insert→Dimension menu.
•
You can set local preferences that control the display of the dimension
type.
Create a dimension — general procedure
The following is a general procedure for creating a dimension of any type.
1. (Optional) Set the local preferences for dimension objects before creating
any dimension.
•
Choose Preferences → Annotation, or click Annotation Preferences
on the Annotation toolbar.
2. In the Drafting application, choose Insert → Dimension
3. Select the dimension type you want to create, or click any dimension
button on the Dimension toolbar.
4. Select the objects you want to dimension.
Use the Line and Snap Point options (when available) to help with
selection.
5. (Optional) Use the shortcut menu options to control the display and
position of the dimension before placing it.
on the dialog bar if you want to
6. (Optional) Select Stack Annotation
stack the dimension with other annotation.
19
on the dialog bar if
7. (Optional) Select Align Horizontal or Vertical
you want to align the dimension vertically or horizontally with other
annotation.
8. Click to place the dimension.
Essentials for NX Designers
19-35
Introduction to Drafting
Annotation Preferences
Use the Annotation Preferences dialog box (Preferences→Annotation) to
configure global settings that affect dimensions.
The following pages in the Annotation Preferences dialog box apply to
dimensions:
Dimensions
Control the display of extension lines and arrows,
orientation of text, precision and tolerance, chamfer
dimensions, and narrow dimensions.
Line/Arrow
Control the style and size of leaders, arrows, and extension
lines for both dimensions and other annotations. A
preview area provides a rendition of the symbol with
leaders and dimensions.
Lettering
Control the alignment, justification, size, and font of text.
Units
Control the desired unit of measure for dimensions
and whether dimensions are created in single or dual
dimension format.
Radial
Control the settings that are unique to diameter and
radius dimensions.
19
19-36
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Dimension preferences and placement
When you select a dimension type, the corresponding dimension dialog bar
appears.
The settings that you set on the dialog bar affect only dimensions you are
currently creating. The settings return to global values when you exit
dimension creation or choose Reset.
1 Tolerance Types
2
Primary Nominal
Precision
3 Text Editor
4 Dimension Style
5 Reset
6 Driving Dimension
Lets you specify the tolerance values for the
dimension. You can select from a list of available
tolerance types.
Lets you set the precision for the primary nominal
precision from 0-6 decimal places from a list.
If the preferences format is fractional, then the
list displays fractional precision values.
Displays the full Text Editor dialog box where you
can enter symbols and appended text.
Enter a tolerance value, or values, using on-screen
input boxes.
Opens the Dimension Style dialog box.
Use this option to affect settings as you create one
or more dimensions.
The global settings are restored when you exit
from creating dimensions.
Resets local preferences to previous current
settings in the part and clear appended text.
Lets you indicate whether the dimension should
be treated as a driving sketch dimension or as a
documentation dimension.
This option is only available when a sketch is
created on the drawing sheet.
Lets you stack a new dimension with other
7 Stack Annotation
annotation on the drawing sheet.
Lets you automatically align a new dimension
Alignment Horizontal
8
horizontally or vertically with other annotation
or Vertical
on the drawing sheet.
Essentials for NX Designers
19-37
19
Introduction to Drafting
Annotation placement options
When you select a dimension type to create, the annotation placement options
appear on the Selection bar.
1 Associative Origin
2 Alignment Position
3 Origin Tool
Associate the entity origin so that it is always
aligned with another dimension.
Specify the alignment position on object such as
top-left, mid-center, bottom-right.
Open the Origin Tool dialog box.
Snap Point options
Snap point options appear on the Selection bar while you are working with
dimensions.
These options act as a filter for selecting geometric points. You can either
select or deselect any of these in order to limit your selection to specific types
of points.
Use the Two-curve Intersection button (at the right end of the toolbar) to
select any two edges whose intersection you cannot fit inside the select ball.
When you select it, all the other buttons are unavailable.
You can press the Esc key at any time to release all selected objects.
Placement cues for dimensions
As you create dimensions, you can align them with an existing dimension.
Graphical cues appear when the origins of two dimensions are vertically or
horizontally aligned.
If you want the new dimension associated with the existing dimension, make
sure the Associative Origin button
is active.
19
19-38
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Append text to a dimension
You can append text to a dimension while you are creating it.
If you want only one line of appended text, select the object(s) to dimension
and, before you place the dimension, choose one of the appended text options
in the shortcut menu.
You may also press the right (after), left (before), up (above), or down
(below) arrow key on the keyboard to open a window to input a single
line of text.
If the text is complex, use the Text Editor
from the dimension dialog bar.
To add appended text to a previously created dimension that does not already
have appended text, do one of the following:
•
to create the text, then drag the text until it’s highlighted
Use Note
in a dashed box in the correct placement position.
•
Double-click the dimension, and open the Text Editor from the dialog bar.
•
Double-click the dimension, and use the shortcut menu to choose either
Appended Text (for a single line of text), or Text Editor (for complex text).
•
Double-click the dimension, and use the Right (after), Left (before), Up
(above), or Down (below) arrow key on the keyboard to get the appended
text location you desire. Type the text and press Enter.
To edit existing appended text, do one of the following:
•
Double-click the appended text.
•
Double-click the dimension and use the Right (after), Left (before), Up
(above), or Down (below) arrow key on the keyboard to get the appended
text location you desire.
•
Select the dimension, and open the shortcut menu over the appended text.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-39
Introduction to Drafting
Change text orientation and text arrow placement
•
To set the text orientation and text arrow placement as you create a
dimension, open the shortcut menu before you place the text.
•
To change the text orientation and text arrow placement of an existing
dimension, edit the dimension style.
Move a dimension
To change the origin of an existing dimension, simply drag it when no
command is active.
The cursor will change to
when you are in the move mode.
19
19-40
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Edit a dimension
1. Use one of the following methods for selecting a dimension.
•
Select a dimension. Right-click, choose the appropriate the option,
and execute your edit.
•
Double-click a dimension.
This action selects the dimension and activates the relevant dimension
dialog bar for editing.
•
Select a dimension. Choose Edit → Annotation → Text.
•
Choose Edit → Annotation → Text, then select a Dimension.
Once you select a dimension for editing, you are in Edit mode, as
indicated by the wrench cursor
Dimension dialog bar.
and the presence of the Edit
2. Edit the selected dimension or select another dimension to edit.
To select another dimension, either click or double-click another
dimension, and based on where you selected, an on-screen input box may
also display.
3. Click Esc or middle mouse button to deactivate the dimension icon options
when you are finished editing.
Change the precision of a dimension
1. Double-click the dimension.
2. Do one of the following:
•
Choose Nominal Precision from the shortcut menu.
•
From the Edit Dimension dialog bar, in the Value group, click the
precision list.
•
On the keyboard, press the number key that corresponds to the
desired precision.
Essentials for NX Designers
19
19-41
Introduction to Drafting
Inherit preferences from an existing dimension
After you create a dimension, you can edit its preference settings to match
another dimension:
1. Double-click the dimension you want to change.
2. Right-click the dimension and choose Inherit.
3. Select the dimension that has the desired preference settings.
19
19-42
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Activities: Drafting — dimensions
In the Introduction to drafting section, do the activity:
•
Create dimensions
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-43
Introduction to Drafting
Note
Use Note
to create and edit notes and labels. A note consists of text,
while a label consists of text with one or more leader lines.
Text can be imported by reference to expressions, part attributes and object
attributes, and can include symbols formed from control character sequences
or user-defined symbols.
While editing or creating notes, labels, or GD&T, NX provides a preview
directly in the graphics window as you enter each character.
Where do I find it?
Application
Drafting
Toolbar
Menu
Annotation→Note
Insert→Annotation→Note
Helper lines
Helper lines act as a guide to allow you to align notes, labels, dimensions,
symbols, and views with other objects on the drawing sheet. Helper lines
appear as a dashed line.
To use helper lines, move the cursor over the object to which you want to
align as you are placing the new annotation. The note highlights and helper
lines appear.
Click to place the annotation at the desired location.
19
19-44
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Create a note
On Windows, while in the Drafting application, you can drag a text file
onto a drawing sheet to create a note.
1. Open the Note dialog box in one of these ways:
•
Choose Insert→Annotation→Note.
•
On the Annotation toolbar, click Note
.
2. Type the desired text in the Text Input box.
Text appears in the text box and at your cursor location in the graphics
window.
3. Move the cursor to the desired location and click to place the note.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-45
Introduction to Drafting
Create a label
1. On the Annotation toolbar, click Note
Insert→Annotation→Note.
or choose
2. Type the desired text into the Text Input box.
Text appears in the text box and in the graphics window.
3. Place the cursor over geometry.
4. Click and drag to create a leader.
To create multiple leaders, click and drag on different geometry.
5. Click again to place the label on the drawing (single leader shown below).
Tips
•
Before placing the note, you can select additional options from the Note
dialog box.
•
You can align annotations using helper lines that appear when you move
the cursor near existing annotation.
19
19-46
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Edit an existing note or label
1. Right-click the existing note or label.
2. Choose the appropriate option from the shortcut menu.
You can display the Note dialog box and edit text by double-clicking
the note or label.
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-47
Introduction to Drafting
Activities: Drafting — Notes and labels
In the Introduction to drafting section, do the activity:
•
Create notes and labels
19
19-48
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Introduction to Drafting
Projects: Drafting
In the Projects section, there are two drafting projects to further practice
creating sheets, views, notes and annotations.
Tier 1
Pulley - part 6
Tier 2
Flywheel - part 6
19
Essentials for NX Designers
19-49
Introduction to Drafting
Summary: Drafting
Use the Drafting application to create and edit drawing sheets. Views and
dimensions on a drawing sheet are associative to the solid model and update
when changes are made to the model.
Use the Note command to create notes and labels.
In this lesson you:
•
Applied the master model concept to create a drawing.
•
Modified a drawing sheet.
•
Added views to a drawing sheet.
•
Created dimensions.
•
Added notes to a drawing sheet.
19
19-50
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Appendix
A Practice projects
This appendix contains additional practice projects.
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-1
Practice projects
Practice Project 1
A
A-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
Practice Project 2
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-3
Practice projects
Practice Project 3
A
A-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-5
Practice projects
Practice Project 4
A
A-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-7
Practice projects
Practice Project 5
A
A-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-9
Practice projects
Practice Project 6
A
A-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-11
Practice projects
Practice Project 7
A
A-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-13
Practice projects
Practice Project 8
A
A-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-15
Practice projects
Practice Project 9
A
A-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-17
Practice projects
Practice Project 10
A
A-18
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
Practice Project 11
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-19
Practice projects
A
A-20
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
Practice Project 12
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-21
Practice projects
A
A-22
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
Practice Project 13
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-23
Practice projects
A
A-24
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
Practice Project 14
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-25
Practice projects
A
A-26
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
Practice Project 15
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-27
Practice projects
Practice Project 16
A
A-28
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-29
Practice projects
Practice Project 17
A
A-30
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-31
Practice projects
Practice Project 18
A
A-32
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-33
Practice projects
Practice Project 19
A
A-34
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-35
Practice projects
Practice Project 20
A
A-36
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-37
Practice projects
Practice Project 21
A
A-38
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-39
Practice projects
Practice Project 22
A
A-40
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-41
Practice projects
Practice Project 23
A
A-42
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-43
Practice projects
A
A-44
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
Practice Project 24
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-45
Practice projects
A
A-46
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-47
Practice projects
A
A-48
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Practice projects
Practice Project 25
A
Essentials for NX Designers
A-49
A
B
Appendix
B Expression operators
This appendix describes the operators and functions that you can use in
expressions.
Essentials for NX Designers
B-1
Expression operators
B
Operators
There are several types of operators that you may use in the expression
language.
+
*
/
%
^
=
Arithmetic operators
Addition
Subtraction and Negative Sign
Multiplication
Division
Modulus
Exponential
Assignment
>
<
>=
<=
==
!=
!
& or &&
| or ||
B-2
Essentials for NX Designers
Example
p2=p5+p3
p2=p5–p3
p2=p5*p3
p2=p5/p3
p2=p5%p3
p2=p5^2
p2=p5
Relational and Boolean operators
Greater Than
Less Than
Greater Than or Equal
Less Than or Equal
Equal
Not Equal
Negate
Logical AND
Logical OR
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Expression operators
B
Precedence and associativity
In the table below, operators in the same row have equal precedence while
operators in the following rows have less precedence.
Operators
^
Precedence and associativity
Associativity
Right to left
– (change sign)
* / %
+ –
> <
>=
<=
==
!=
&&
||
=
Left to right
Right to left
When using operators with the same precedence in an equation without
parameters, use left-to-right or the right-to-left rule from the table. For
example:
X = 90 – 10 + 30 = 110 (not 50)
X = 90 – (10 + 30) = 50
Essentials for NX Designers
B-3
Expression operators
B
Legacy unit conversion
Although when dimensionality is specified and units are assigned the
system handles conversions, legacy parts may have used functions for unit
conversion. For legacy compatibility these functions are supported.
Functions for unit conversion
B-4
cm
cm(x) converts x from centimeters to the default units of the part
ft
ft(x) converts x from feet to the default units of the part
grd
in
grd(x) converts x from gradients to degrees
in(x) converts x from inches to the default units of the part
km
mc
mc(x) converts x from microns to the default units of the part
min
min(x) converts x from minutes to degrees.
ml
mm
ml(x) converts x from mils to the default units of the part
mtr
mtr(x) converts x from meters to the default units of the part
sec
sec(x) converts x from seconds to degrees
yd
yd(x) converts x from yards to the default units of the part
km(x) converts x from kilometers to the default units of the part
mm(x) converts x from millimeters to the default units of the part
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Expression operators
B
Built-in functions
Built-in functions include math, string, and engineering functions.
Scientific notation
You may optionally enter numbers in scientific notation. The value you enter
must contain a positive or negative sign. For example, you can enter:
2e+5 which is the same as the value 200000
2e-5 which is the same as the value .00002
Built-in functions
abs
Returns the absolute value of a given number
arccos
Returns the inverse cosine of a given number in degrees
arcsin
Returns the inverse sine of a given number in degrees
arctan
Returns the inverse tangent of a given number in degrees
from –90 to +90
arctan2
Returns the inverse tangent of a given delta x divided by a
given delta y in degrees from –180 to +180
ASCII
Returns the ASCII code of the first character in a given
string or zero if the string is empty
ceiling
Returns the smallest integer that is bigger than a given
number
Char
Returns the ASCII character for a given integer in the
range 1 to 255
charReplace
Returns a new string from a given source string, character
to replace and the corresponding replacement characters.
compareString Case sensitive compare of two strings
cos
Returns the cosine of a given number in degrees
dateTimeString Returns the system date and time in the format “Fri Nov
21 09:56:12 2005/n”
floor
Returns the largest integer less than or equal to a given
number
format
Returns a formatted string, using C-style formatting
specification
getenv
Returns the string value of a given environment variable
string
hypcos
Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a given number
hypsin
Returns the hyperbolic sine of a given number
hyptan
Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a given number
Essentials for NX Designers
B-5
Expression operators
B
log
log10
MakeNumber
max
min
mod
Built-in functions
Returns the natural logarithm of a given number
Returns the logarithm base 10 of a given number
Returns the number or integer of a given numerical string
Returns the largest number from a given number and
additional numbers
Returns the smallest number from a given number and
additional numbers
Returns the remainder (modulus) when a given numerator
is divided by a given denominator (by integer division)
NormalizeAngle Normalizes a given angle (degrees) to be between 0 and
360 degrees
Returns pi
pi()
Radians
replaceString
round
sin
sqrt
StringLower
StringUpper
StringValue
subString
tan
ug_ functions
B-6
Essentials for NX Designers
Converts an angle in degrees into radians
Replaces all occurrences of str1 with str2
Returns the integer nearest to a given number, returns the
even integer if the given number ends in .5
Returns the sine of a given number in degrees
Returns the inverse square root of a given positive number
Returns a lowercase string from a given string
Returns an uppercase string from a given string
Returns a string containing a textual representation of a
given value
Returns a new string containing a subset of the elements
from the original list
Returns the sine of a given number
see the documentation for descriptions of dozens more
specialized math and engineering functions
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Appendix
C Point options
C
This appendix describes the options to create points.
Essentials for NX Designers
C-1
Point options
Point dialog box
Use the Point dialog box to create point objects or specify locations in
three-dimensional space.
C
You specify a point by choosing a type and selecting geometry or by typing X,
Y, and Z coordinates directly.
C-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Point options
Point types
The Type group of the Point dialog box has buttons representing various
methods for specifying a point. As the cursor is passed over these buttons,
text shows the name of the method.
C
Inferred Point
Specifies the point option to use based on your
selection.
Cursor Location
Specifies a position at the location of the cursor. The
location lies in the plane of the WCS.
Existing Point
Specifies a position by selecting an existing point
object.
End Point
Specifies a position at the end points of existing lines,
arcs, conics, and other curves.
Control Point
Specifies a position at the control points of geometric
objects.
Intersection Point
Specifies a position at the intersection of two curves or
at the intersection of a curve and a surface or plane.
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere
Center
Specifies a position at the center of an arc, ellipse,
circular or elliptical edge, or sphere.
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
Specifies a position at an angular position along an
arc or an ellipse.
Quadrant Point
Specifies a position at the quarter points of an arc or
an ellipse. You can also define a point on the extension
of an arc.
Point on Curve/Edge Specifies a position on a curve or edge. The U
parameter can be edited.
Point on Face
Specifies a position on a face. The U and V parameters
can be edited.
Between Two Points
Specifies a position mid way between two points.
By Expression
Specifies a point using an expression of the type Point.
Essentials for NX Designers
C-3
C
Appendix
D Primitive solids
D
This appendix describes the common commands to create primitive solids.
Essentials for NX Designers
D-1
Primitive solids
Primitive solids
A primitive is a solid body that is has an basic mathematical shape.
As an alternative to sketching when the model is quite simple, you could use
a primitive as the base feature of your solid model.
When you create a primitive body, you specify its type, size, location, and
orientation.
The four types of primitives are:
D
•
Block
•
Cylinder
•
Cone
•
Sphere
Although NX allows the use of multiple primitives, the practice is not
recommended.
D-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Primitive solids
Block
Create a Block by specifying the size and location.
The orientation is inferred from the WCS.
There are three Type options you can use to create a Block:
•
Origin and Edge Lengths
•
Two Points and Height
•
Two Diagonal Points
D
Essentials for NX Designers
D-3
Primitive solids
Cylinder
Create a Cylinder by specifying the axis vector, location, and size.
There are two Type options you can use to create a Cylinder:
•
Axis, Diameter, and Height
•
Arc and Height
D
D-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Appendix
E Features with predefined shapes
This appendix discusses additional features that can be associatively
positioned. Features formerly called form features include holes, slots, bosses,
pads, pockets and grooves.
E
Essentials for NX Designers
E-1
Features with predefined shapes
Boss
The Boss feature is used to add a cylindrical shape with a specified height to
a model, having either straight or tapered sides.
1 — Diameter
2 — Height
3 — Taper Angle
E
A positive or negative value may be entered depending on which way the wall
is to incline. A zero value results in a vertical cylinder wall.
E-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Features with predefined shapes
Slot
This option allows you to create a slot in a solid body as if cut by a milling
machine tool. In each case, the shape of the cutting tool corresponds to the
slot type and dimensions.
The slot feature will be created so that the axis of the cutting tool is normal to
the face or datum plane selected. Initially, the path of the slot will be parallel
to the selected Horizontal Reference.
There are several different slot types available. You will be prompted for the
parameters that apply to the type of slot chosen.
Rectangular slot
The Rectangular slot type uses a tool that has cylindrical end faces and will
produce sharp edges along the bottom of the slot.
1 — Length
2 — Width
3 — Depth
The Width of the rectangular slot represents the diameter of the cylindrical
cutting tool.
The Depth of the slot is measured in a direction parallel to the tool axis from
the placement face to the bottom of the slot. Depth values must be positive.
The Length is measured parallel to the horizontal reference (X in the feature
coordinate system). Length values must be positive.
Essentials for NX Designers
E-3
E
Features with predefined shapes
Other slot types
The other available slot profiles are shown below.
Ball-End
U-Slot
T-Slot
E
Dove-Tail
Thru slot
The Thru Slot option can be applied to all slot types and extends the length of
the slot along the placement face in the direction of the horizontal reference
between two specified faces.
You will be prompted to select starting and ending thru faces instead of a
length parameter. The two thru faces cannot be parallel to the placement face.
The rectangular slot shown below was created with the Thru Slot option
enabled. The selected starting and ending thru faces are shaded.
You should not dimension to the end arcs of the slot when positioning a Thru
Slot. The length of a Thru Slot is determined by the selected thru faces. The
only positioning dimension required is to locate an edge or centerline along
the length of the slot (tool) to a target edge or datum. Parallel at a Distance
can be used to constrain the feature and control the two remaining degrees
of freedom.
E-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Features with predefined shapes
Pocket
The pocket feature is used to create a cavity in a solid body.
There are three types of pockets:
•
Cylindrical (not covered in this lesson)
•
Rectangular
•
General (not covered in this lesson)
Rectangular pocket
This option allows a rectangular pocket to be defined to a specified depth, with
or without a floor and/or corner radius, having either straight or tapered walls.
The following parameters may be specified:
1 — Length
2 — Width
3 — Depth
4 — Corner Radius
5 — Floor Radius
6 — Taper Angle
The pocket is initially oriented so that the Length is parallel to the
selected Horizontal Reference.
Pocket features may be positioned from a tool edge or from the centerlines
provided for this purpose.
Essentials for NX Designers
E-5
E
Features with predefined shapes
Pad
This option allows a raised pad on a solid body.
There are two types of pads:
•
Rectangular
•
General (not covered in this lesson)
Rectangular pad
This option allows a rectangular pad to be defined to a specified height, with
or without a corner radius and/or taper.
E
The following parameters may be specified:
1 — Length
2 — Width
3 — Height
4 — Corner Radius
5 — Taper Angle
The pad is initially oriented so that the Length is parallel to the
selected Horizontal Reference.
E-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Features with predefined shapes
Groove
The groove feature requires a cylindrical or conical placement face. A groove
can be thought of as a feature that would result from a part being cut in a
lathe. After specifying the groove parameters, you will be shown a preview
of the tool solid. The tool solid can be thought of as the path that the lathe
would make as it cuts the solid.
Positioning a Groove
You only have to position a groove along the axis of the cylindrical or conical
placement face. The Positioning dialog box will not appear. Instead, you are
only required to specify a horizontal dimension along the axis by selecting a
target edge followed by a tool edge or centerline.
Two grooves are shown in the following example.
1 — Target Edge
2 — Tool Edge (or centerline)
Essentials for NX Designers
E-7
E
Features with predefined shapes
Positioning methods
Positioning is a legacy method used to place the legacy form features relative
to other geometry.
Horizontal
Specifies the horizontal distance between two points, one on the target solid
and the other on the tool solid. Horizontal is measured along the X-axis of the
feature coordinate system (the Horizontal Reference). As edges are selected,
the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
1 — Horizontal Reference
2 — Target Edge (End Point)
E
3 — Tool Edge (Tangent Point)
E-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Features with predefined shapes
Vertical
Specifies the vertical distance between two points, one on the target solid and
the other on the tool solid. Vertical is measured along the Y-axis of the feature
coordinate system (perpendicular to the Horizontal Reference). As edges are
selected, the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
1 — Horizontal Reference
2 — Target Edge (End Point)
3 — Tool Edge (Arc Center)
E
Essentials for NX Designers
E-9
Features with predefined shapes
Perpendicular
Specifies the shortest (normal) distance between a linear edge on the target
solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid. The linear
target edge is always selected first.
1 — Target Edge
2 — Tool Edge (Arc Center)
E
Point onto Line
Specifies that the distance between an edge on the target solid (also datum
planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid is zero.
Point onto Line is the same as the Perpendicular positioning dimension
with the value automatically set to zero. You can change it to a non-zero
value when you edit the feature.
1 — Target Edge (Datum Plane)
2 — Tool Edge (Arc Center)
E-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Features with predefined shapes
Parallel
Specifies the shortest distance between two points, one point on the target
solid and the other point on the tool solid. As edges are selected, the nearest
valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
1 — Target Edge (Arc Center)
2 — Tool Edge (Arc Center)
E
Point onto Point
Specifies the distance between a point on the target solid and a point on the
tool solid is zero. This is commonly used to align arc centers (concentric) of
cylindrical or conical features. This method fully constrains their location
since rotation is not a degree of freedom for cylindrical or conical features.
Point onto Point is the same as the Parallel positioning dimension with
the value automatically set to zero. You can change it to a non-zero
value when you edit the feature.
1 — Target Edge (Arc Center)
2 — Tool Edge (Arc Center)
Essentials for NX Designers
E-11
Features with predefined shapes
Parallel at a distance
Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also a datum plane or datum
axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be parallel and at a given
distance. This is typically used for features with length (slot, pocket or pad).
Using Parallel at a Distance will solve two of the three degrees of freedom
necessary to fully specify a feature having a length (rotation and translation
in one direction). Adding another Parallel at a Distance or Line onto Line
dimension would overspecify the location of the feature.
To fully specify the feature in the example an additional positioning
dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal,
Vertical, Perpendicular).
1 — Target Edge
E
2 — Tool Edge (Centerline of Slot)
E-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Features with predefined shapes
Line onto line
Specifies that the distance between a linear edge on the target solid (or a
datum plane or datum axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid is zero and
they are constrained parallel to each other. This is typically used for features
with length (slot, pocket, or pad).
Using Line onto Line will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary
to fully specify a feature having a length (rotational and translation in one
direction). Adding another Line onto Line or Parallel at a Distance dimension
would overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify the feature in
the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve
the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Point onto Line).
Line onto Line is the same as the Parallel at a Distance positioning
dimension with the value automatically set to zero. This zero value can
be changed to a non-zero value when editing the feature.
1 — Target Edge (Datum Plane)
2 — Tool Edge (Centerline of Slot)
Essentials for NX Designers
E-13
E
Features with predefined shapes
Angular
Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also a datum plane or datum
axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be at a given angle to each
other. The angle is measured in a counter-clockwise direction (with respect to
the feature coordinate system), from the ends of the edges nearest to where
they are selected.
1 — Target Edge
2 — Tool Edge (Edge of Pocket)
E
E-14
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Features with predefined shapes
Edit positioning
As features are created the parametric data is captured in expressions.
The parametric data consists of the actual feature size definition (i.e.
diameter, height, length) as well as the positional data that is captured in
the positioning dimensions.
This option allows a feature to be moved by editing its positioning dimensions.
In addition, positioning dimensions may be added to features that are either
underspecified or were not given any positioning dimensions at the time
of creation.
Once the feature has been selected, the following options are offered based
upon the positioning status of the selected feature:
•
Add Dimension
•
Edit Dimension Value
•
Delete Dimension
E
Essentials for NX Designers
E-15
Features with predefined shapes
Add dimension
This option may be used to add a positioning dimension to a feature.
When adding positioning dimensions, any edge (1) resulting from the
intersection of the feature being positioned (2) and a face on the target solid
(3) may not be selected as the tool edge.
Valid target edges for positioning purposes must belong to features existing
in the feature creation list of the model before the feature being positioned.
E
Edit dimension value
Features may be moved by changing the values of the feature’s positioning
dimensions.
To use this option:
•
Select the dimension to edit (if there is only one positioning dimension, it
is selected automatically).
•
Type the new value.
Continue editing as many dimension values as desired. Once all the desired
dimension values have been edited, click OK.
E-16
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Features with predefined shapes
Delete dimension
Use this option to delete a positioning dimension from a feature. The feature
will then remain in its current location as its position is no longer associated
to the model.
If you are replacing a dimension, add the new dimension before deleting
the old one. The Edit Positioning dialog box is maintained when you
add a dimension but is automatically dismissed when you delete a
dimension.
Display dimensions
The Display Dimensions option in the Feature Browser temporarily displays
the parameters of size and location in the graphics window for the feature.
Refreshing the graphics window removes the temporary display of the
parameters.
Display Dimensions can also be accessed using the Part Navigator.
Essentials for NX Designers
E-17
E
E
Appendix
F Customer Defaults
This appendix describes utilities and customization files which affect the
default interface and behavior of NX. These topics would normally be the
responsibility of a system administrator.
F
Essentials for NX Designers
F-1
Customer Defaults
Customer Defaults
Customer defaults are accessed by choosing File→Utilities→Customer
Defaults.
When NX is first started (out-of-the-box) the defaults are set to User and a
variable points to a user file which may or may not exist. This is an extract
from the log file for a user named “nxuser” after logging in and starting NX
for the first time:
Processing customer default values file
C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser
/Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions
/nx8.5/nx8.5_user.dpv
User customizations file
C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser
/Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions
/nx8.5/nx8.5_user.dpv does not exist
The fact that the file does not exist is of no concern because the path is
writable for the person logged in.
NX will create the file nx8.5_user.dpv when and if the user makes a change to
the defaults.
F
If the administrator wishes to prevent the user from changing the defaults,
i.e., set them as User (Read Only), there are various ways to accomplish it:
F-2
•
Create the file and customize it as you wish, and then make it read only.
•
Define the file in a path to which the user cannot write. The file and the
path need not exist.
•
Lock one or more defaults at a higher level, i.e. group or site level.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Customer Defaults
Customer Defaults levels
Customer defaults can be controlled at three levels: Site, Group, and User.
Site is the highest level, User is the lowest. Any or all of these levels may be
available to you, based on how the customer default environment variables
are defined at your site. If none of the environment variables are defined, the
level is Shipped (read-only).
System administrators or managers at a higher level can lock the settings of
customer defaults that they do not want anyone at the lower levels to change.
The Group level can lock customer defaults at the User level, and the Site
level can lock defaults at the Group and User levels. You cannot lock defaults
at the User level.
When a lock is active not only is the text de-emphasized but value change
is prohibited. Even if the site (or a lower) DPV file is writable the value of
a locked default can not be changed until the lock icon has been toggled off
for the given default).
Essentials for NX Designers
F-3
F
Customer Defaults
For example, to lock out the ability to create promoted bodies, the manager
clicks the lock beside promotions at the site or group level. The icon changes
color and the text is de-emphasized.
At the user level, that default is de-emphasized an a padlock is displayed
beside it.
F
The manager can use the Default Lock State option to set the global locked
status for all of the customer defaults on all defaults pages. This allows
strategies like All are locked except...or All are unlocked except... instead of
requiring the assertion of 5000+ individual locks.
Locks at the group level change color and the text is de-emphasized.
The user then sees all options for Site Standards de-emphasized and
padlocked. This prevents Site Standards from being changed at the user level.
F-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Customer Defaults
Setting Customer Defaults
Customer defaults have as-shipped default settings that are hard-coded.
When you change defaults at any level (assuming you have write permission
and the levels are defined) a file is created to save the settings. By default the
file is called nx8.5_user.dpv, nx8.5_group.dpv, or nx8.5_site.dpv.
Only the defaults that are changed from the hard–coded settings are saved,
thus the DPV files can be very small in size.
Customer defaults files are defined by environment settings. These are
typically set in ugii_env.dat on Windows systems; however, the administrator
may prevent a user from spoofing these settings by creating a file named
ugii_env.master in the UGII directory where NX is installed to define these
particular environment settings. When this file exists any attempt to redefine
the environment variables will be ignored.
When you change defaults the changes are NOT effective immediately.
They will be in effect the next time NX is started.
F
Essentials for NX Designers
F-5
Customer Defaults
Customer Defaults environment variables
To set up a User, Group, or Site level, you must define the appropriate
environment variable with a directory. You must first create a directory
named startup where you want to store the customer defaults file for that
level.
Level
Variable
User
Group
Site
UGII_USER_DIR
UGII_GROUP_DIR
UGII_SITE_DIR
Defaults File
(in the startup directory)
nx8.5_user.dpv
nx8.5_group.dpv
nx8.5_site.dpv
If you are already using the UGII_USER_DIR environment variable for other
purposes, you can use the UGII_LOCAL_USER_DEFAULTS environment
variable. When you define the environment variable, you must point it to the
.dpv file you will use (instead of just the directory, as done with the other
environment variables).
F
If both of these environment variables are defined, the system uses
the UGII_LOCAL_USER_DEFAULTS environment variable to define
the customer defaults User level. NX is shipped with this variable
defined, so if you want to use a common user directory (i.e., the one
defined by UGII_USER_DIR), you must remove the definition for
UGII_LOCAL_USER_DEFAULTS from your environment variables
file.
F-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Customer Defaults
USER, GROUP, and SITE directories
There is a standard structure for customer site installation of menu files and
shared libraries. This directory structure defines three subdirectories. For
the purpose of this discussion only the startup folder need exist; however, you
might encounter the others if you have site customization.
startup
Contains site-specific menu files, defaults files, and shared
libraries of menu actions to be loaded automatically at NX
startup to customize Gateway.
application
Contains site-specific files defining menus and shared
libraries of menu actions for customizing NX or third-party
applications, such as NX Open programs. Loading of each
shared library is deferred until you enter the application that
names the library on the LIBRARIES statement in the menu
file definition for the Application Button for the application.
User Tool Definition files, GRIP programs, User Function
programs that are referenced by menu file actions.
udo
Contains the shared libraries defining methods for
site-specific User Defined Objects (another NX Open topic.)
Essentials for NX Designers
F
F-7
Customer Defaults
Managing your changes
The DPV files contain only the defaults that are changed from the hard–coded
settings.
You may review your changes at any time:
•
Set the Defaults Level to the level you want to examine, Site, Group,
or User.
•
On the Customer Defaults dialog box, click Manage Current Settings.
Here is an example of standard classroom defaults at the group level:
F
F-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Customer Defaults
Updating to a new release of NX
To update to a new release, you need only define the DPV files you want to
use at whatever levels your organization uses.
When you receive the new software use Import Defaults to validate your
previous settings against the new release.
Importing Customer Defaults values file:
file.>
Total settings and locks imported:
<full path specification of DPV
10
Total settings rejected due to values not valid in this release:
0
Total settings rejected due to values being locked at the higher level:
Total settings already set to the same value and lock status:
Total settings not recognized in this release:
0
0
0
F
Essentials for NX Designers
F-9
F
Appendix
G Custom Roles
Roles provide a method to create a custom user interface based on a user
or departments needs.
In this appendix, you will create user and group roles.
G
Essentials for NX Designers
G-1
Custom Roles
User-Defined Roles
By default, when you begin an NX session you are presented with a core set
of functionality but more specific Roles (sets of tools) can be accessed through
the Resource bar.
These prepackaged roles are a starting point from which you can customize
the NX user interface and save as a personal user role.
As a user, there are two different repositories for user-defined roles:
•
The User folder where you can store your individual roles that reflect your
personal user interface layouts with their specific menus, toolbars etc.
G
Because these are your personal roles, the .mtx files that define them
reside in a user directory. In Windows, these roles reside in /Documents
and Settings/<yourname>/Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics
Solutions/NX85/Roles/
•
A new palette which references roles in a directory.
You can use these palettes to store departmental/group specific roles and
put permission restrictions on their respective directories.
G-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Custom Roles
Create a User Role
It is important to customize the interface (toolbars, menus, etc.) the
way you want it before you create a role.
1. On the Resource bar, click the Roles tab
.
2. Right-click in the background of the Roles palette and choose New User
Role.
This displays the Role Properties dialog box.
3. Specify the role properties.
1. Name of the .mtx file as
stored
2. Name of Role as referenced
in your NX interface
3. Graphic for the Role icon;
type in name or Browse
4. Description of the role.
5. Application(s) referenced in
Role
6. Toggles to structure Role;
Current Only is used
to capture a customized
interface
7. If selected, the settings for all
dialog boxes in the selected
applications are stored with
the Role.
Essentials for NX Designers
G-3
G
Custom Roles
4. Click OK to create new ’User’ role.
G
G-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Custom Roles
Activity: Create a User Role
In this activity you will create a user role.
Step 1:
Open roles_1.
The buttons and menu options you see here reflect the base
functionality of Gateway when you start a new part.
Step 2:
Select a Role.
Choose the Roles tab
Roles pane.
on the Resource bar and pin the
From the System Defaults folder, click the Advanced role.
In the Load Role message box, click OK.
Choose Tools→Customize and change your user interface
(menus, options, toolbars) as desired.
Disregard the Roles tab in the Customize dialog box; you
will learn about its purpose later in the activity.
Step 3:
G
Create a User role to store your customized user interface.
Right-click in the background of the Roles pane and choose
New User Role.
The Role Properties dialog box is displayed.
Step 4:
Define your User role properties.
In the Name box, type role_1_xxx, where xxx are your initials.
This is the name of your role as it will appear in the Resource bar
Roles pane.
The name of the .mtx file (top of dialog) is system-assigned.
The name of your role must be assigned by you.
Click Browse and navigate to the parts directory; that’s where
the image files are.
Set the Files of type to JPEG Files.
Select a role_image_xx file and click OK.
Essentials for NX Designers
G-5
Custom Roles
In the Description box, type the date <mmddyyyy> – <your
last name, first name> – first user role. (Example: 07042008
– Doe, John – first user role)
Your company may set description standards in place
for this data.
Select the Current Only check box.
Notice the Current Only option captures your current,
customized user interface, by application.
Click OK.
Your user role is created.
G
Step 5:
G-6
Close the part.
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Custom Roles
Edit a User Role
After a user role is created, changes can be made by using the Edit
option.
1. Make the toolbar changes that you want to incorporate.
2. On the Resource bar, click the Roles tab
.
3. On the Roles palette, in the User group, right-click your role and choose
Edit.
This displays the Role Properties dialog box.
4. From the Toolbar Layout, Menus and Dialog Memory group, select the
Use Current Session radio button.
G
5. Click OK to update ’User’ role with the changes.
Essentials for NX Designers
G-7
Custom Roles
Create a Group Role
It is important to customize the interface (toolbars, menus, etc.) before
you create a role. If you decide later you want additional customizations
saved with a specified role, you will have to recreate the role.
1. Create a folder to store group roles in a writable directory.
2. Choose Preferences→Palettes.
3. Click Open Directory as Role Palette
.
4. Navigate to the directory you want the new Role palette to point to. This
creates a tab on the Resource bar.
5. Choose Tools→Customize and customize your interface however you
wish.
6. In the Customize dialog box, click the Roles tab.
G
7. Click Create.
8. Navigate to your roles directory.
9. Type a File name for your role and click OK.
10. In the Role Properties dialog box, specify the role definition.
Name of role
Image for icon
Description
Application check boxes
11. Click OK to create the role.
G-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Custom Roles
12. On the Resource bar, in your new palette, right-click and choose Refresh
to see the icon of the new role.
G
Essentials for NX Designers
G-9
Custom Roles
Activity: Create a Role Palette with a Group Role
In this activity, you will create a role palette with a group role that could
be shared with other users.
Step 1:
Create a new folder for the group roles.
In a writable directory, create a folder named grp_role_xxx,
where xxx is your initials.
The group-specific roles will be stored here. The group role palette
will point to this directory.
Step 2:
Open roles_1.
Step 3:
Customize the user interface.
This interface would be based on the design needs of the group.
Choose Tools→Customize and customize the user interface.
Step 4:
Create your role.
In the Customize dialog box, select the Roles tab.
On this page, you can Load an existing user role (.mtx file), create a
new role, and define keyboard accelerators associated with the role.
Click Create.
G
The New Role File dialog is displayed.
Step 5:
Define your new role file.
Expand the Save in list and navigate to the writable directory
you created.
In the File name box, type custom_role_1_xxx, where xxx
are your initials, and click OK.
This will be the name of your custom .mtx file. In the first
(user) role you created, this action was done internally by
NX.
Step 6:
Define the properties of the new role.
In the Role Properties dialog box, in the Name box, type
custom_1_xxx, where xxx are your initials.
This is the name of your role as it will appear in the Resource bar
Roles pane.
The Role Properties dialog is displayed.
G-10
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Custom Roles
Click Browse and navigate to the parts directory where the
image files are located.
Set the Files of type to JPEG Files.
Select a role_image_xx file and click OK.
In the Description box, type in the date <mmddyyyy> – <a
short description of role>. (Example: 11032005 – custom UI
for xyz project)
In the Role Properties dialog box, select the Current Only
check box.
Click OK.
Your custom role is created and is now located in the writable
directory you defined.
Close the Customize dialog box.
Step 7:
Define your new Role palette
Choose Preference→Palettes.
G
Click Open Directory as Role Palette.
Browse to the writable directory where your custom .mtx file
resides.
Select your custom_role_1_xxx.mtx file and click OK.
If you do not see any entries, make sure Files of type is
set to All Files (*.*)
If your directory is correct, OK the Open Directory as Role
Palette dialog box.
Essentials for NX Designers
G-11
Custom Roles
A new tab is added to the Resource bar and your custom role is
displayed.
1. Directory you created to hold
your custom roles
2. Property name of your
custom role
3. Role palette tab created
Close the Palettes dialog box.
Step 8:
Close the part.
G
G-12
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Custom Roles
Protected Roles
The power of Roles can be extended throughout your industry enterprise,
on several levels, by having your company’s systems administrator create
’protected’ roles for authorized workflows.
One Possible Scenario: — Adding System Default Roles
•
Have the group leaders of various departmental processes/disciples
customize the NX user interface to reflect the design needs of that group;
e.g. assemblies, design review, drafting etc. (Activity procedure)
•
The group leaders then create individual Roles for each of the
processes/disciplines.
•
The group leaders alert the NX Systems Administrator where these
role (.mtx) files are located and asks for them to be moved into
the /UGII/menus/roles directory within the NX release. This is a
permissions-protected area.
•
Once the .mtx files are moved into the /UGII/menus/roles directory, they
will be available as Roles in the System Defaults folder.
G
Essentials for NX Designers
G-13
G
Appendix
H Glossary
A
active dimension
Dimensional constraint that controls sketch geometry.
active group
Group in which sketch curves are currently being created.
adaptive shell
Shelled body created in History-free mode. The body consists of a wall
thickness value and a collection of shell relations between its selected shell
faces and its partner faces.
ancestor
File containing the source geometry that is directly or indirectly linked to
the selected object.
anchor point
(Modeling and Sketching) Intersection point of two end tangent vectors in
a general conic.
(Drafting) Reference point for positioning a Drafting symbol or a Drafting
view. The anchor point for a symbol is where a leader line attaches to the
symbol.
H
area fill
Pattern of lines used to fill a defined boundary in a drawing. An area fill is
used to indicate a specific type of material.
array
Series of features typically appearing in a rectangular or radial pattern.
array
Series of features typically appearing in a rectangular or radial pattern.
Essentials for NX Designers
H-1
Glossary
associative point
Point that is related to existing geometry. When the existing geometry is
changed, the associative point updates so it still coincides with the existing
geometry.
associativity
Relationships between individual portions of a model. Changes to the parent
are propagated to the children.
auxiliary view
Drawing view projected from an existing view perpendicular to an angular
hinge line.
B
base view
Modeling view imported into a drawing. The base view can be a stand–alone
view or a parent view for other derived view types, such as a section view.
bend segment
Portion of a section line that connects multiple cut segments in a drawing.
blend
Feature which creates convex or concave rounded transitions between the
faces of a body.
H
break-out section view
View with a portion of the part interior shown within a boundary of curves
in a drawing.
broken view
Compressed view that removes a portion of the model between two break
curves in a drawing.
C
centerline
Drafting symbol consisting of intermittent long and short lines used to bisect
geometry into equal parts.
component
Term used for a part that is a member of an assembly. A component could
be a subassembly consisting of lower-level parts.
H-2
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Glossary
constraint
(Modeling) Relationship which defines the relative position between objects.
Assembly constraints are used to position components in an assembly.
(Sketching) Geometric and dimensional design rules applied to sketch
geometry.
crosshatch
Pattern of single strokes or lines used to fill between a defined boundary
in a drawing view. Crosshatches are often used to indicate specific types
of material.
CSYS
Abbreviation for coordinate system.
H
cut segment
Portion of a section line that defines a cutting plane in a drawing view.
cylindrical dimension
Dimension measuring the diametral distance between two objects or point
positions with an appended diameter symbol.
D
detail view
Child view with circular, rectangular, or user–defined boundary which
contains an enlarged portion of an already existing drawing view.
drafting view
Also referred to as drawing member view.
Essentials for NX Designers
H-3
Glossary
Standard orthographic view created from a model view, or a view of 2D curves
that represent model geometry. A drafting view contains drawing objects. It
is listed in the Part Navigator under the associated Sheet node.
drawing sheet
View that contains drafting views and drawing border objects. Drawing sheet
views are listed in the Part Navigator under the associated Drawing node.
drawing view
Empty view used to manually create a sketch instead of displaying an
associative base view of a model.
E
extension line
Line that connects a dimension to the object being dimensioned.
extracted edge
3D representation of a visible edge that is associative to the parent
component. An extracted edge view does not contain the entire model.
Extracted edges are used to improve the view regeneration performance of
the drawings of complex models, such as large assemblies.
F
faceted representation
Lightweight approximation of the faces that represent the real model. Faceted
representations are used to facilitate quick regeneration of hidden line views.
folded section view
View with a multiple-segment cutting section, displayed as if the cutting
section was unfolded.
H
G
Gn continuity
Also called Cn continuity.
Degree of continuity between two segments of a curve or surface. G0 means
the segments are connected at a point. G1 means the segments are tangent.
G2 means the segments have the same curvature at the connecting point.
H-4
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Glossary
H
helper line
Temporary dotted line that indicates alignment of objects. In Drafting,
helper lines are used to align notes, labels, dimensions, symbols, and views.
In Modeling, helper lines are used to align the control points of curves. In
sketching, helper lines are used to align curves as you sketch.
hinge line
Line used as a reference to rotate a view in proper orthographic space in a
drawing.
I
Inferred
Option that allows the software to determine the method to use for a given
operation. Dimensions, planes, vectors, and points can be created by letting
the software infer an appropriate method. The Inferred method is often the
default method.
instance
Shape-linked feature, similar to a copy. All instances of a feature are
associated, and updated parameters for the feature are reflected in every
instance of the feature.
H
internal sketch
Sketch that is only available for edit from the owning feature, such as an
extrude feature. An internal sketch does not appear as a feature in the
Part Navigator.
K
knot point
Point where B-spline segments connect.
L
layer
Method to control visibility of objects in a model in order to simplify the
display. Layers can be used to organize objects by their purpose. For example,
Essentials for NX Designers
H-5
Glossary
sheet bodies or solid bodies used for constructing features can be stored on a
hidden layer. Only one layer can be the work layer at a time.
layout
Collection of views arranged in a user-defined manner in the graphics window.
leader
Lines that connect the annotation to the associated object. A leader line has a
horizontal stub at one end and an optional arrowhead at the other end.
M
master component
Original component member of a component array that is used to determine
the positions of the other components in the array.
master model
Component file that contains the defining geometry that is referenced by an
assembly, drawing, or manufacturing part. For example, in NX, the master
model is normally kept in one file, and a drawing in another. When the master
model is modified, the drawing views can be updated to reflect the changes.
O
OrientXpress tool
Tool used to select non-associative vector direction and plane orientation.
This tool is commonly used in synchronous modeling commands. For example,
this tool is used to indicate a direction in which to move or pull a face.
H
P
pattern
(Drafting) Drafting objects such as borders, lines, text, or title blocks that
can be saved and recalled.
(Modeling) Array of features or geometry.
R
reference curve
Also called a reference line.
H-6
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Glossary
Curve that is used for constraining geometry but is not used in the section
when creating features. Reference curves are displayed as dashed lines.
Curves in a sketch can be converted to and from reference curves.
reference object
Parent object that is associated to a child object. The reference object is
usually the object that is selected when creating new annotations.
Revolved Section view
View with a wedge-shaped cutting section, displayed as if the cutting section
was unfolded.
S
section cut
2D geometry created by cutting the model geometry with one or more cut
planes to view the planar geometry on the cutting planes.
section line
Arrow segments, bend segments, and cut segments that specify the cut
definition of a section view.
section view
View defined by cutting the model geometry with one or more cut planes to
view the planar geometry on the cutting planes.
seed face
(Manufacturing) Basic face that is used to create other faces or other
geometric objects.
(Modeling) Face that specifies the initial face of a region of faces. The region
feature is created from all faces that connect to the seed face. The chain of
connections is limited by the selected boundary geometry and possibly limited
by an angle tolerance between faces that share an edge.
shell
Previously called hollow.
Thin walled part created by removing some faces and thickening other faces.
sketch on path
Specialized type of constrained sketch where users select the target path and
define a sketch plane location along that path.
Essentials for NX Designers
H-7
H
Glossary
stack
Set of Drafting annotations that maintain a positional relationship with each
other.
stub
Horizontal portion of a leader that connects an angled leader line with the
text or symbol.
T
tangent continuous curves
Two curves that connect with G1 continuity.
Timestamp Order
Viewing mode in the Part Navigator where features are listed in creation
order.
traceline
Line that shows the path of a component in an exploded view.
V
view boundary
Boundary used to limit the geometry displayed in a view.
H
W
WAVE-linked body
Body that has been associatively copied from one part to another using one of
the WAVE commands.
work coordinate system (WCS)
Movable coordinate system. The coordinates of the WCS are called work
coordinates and are denoted by XC, YC, ZC axes. The XC-YC plane is called
the work plane.
H-8
Essentials for NX Designers
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Glossary
work layer
Layer on which geometry and drawing annotations are constructed. There is
only one work layer at a time.
H
Essentials for NX Designers
H-9
H
Index
A
Activity
Creating a Role Palette with a Group
Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
Creating a User Role . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Analysis
assign material properties . . . . . 8-28
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Measure Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Measure Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Annotation
dimension preferences and
placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-37
placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-38
helper lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-44
preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-36
preferences and placement
placement cues for
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 19-38
snap point options . . . . . . . 19-38
Applications
Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Add Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Dialog box options . . . 18-5, 18-10
Assembly constraints . . . . . . . . 18-12
Show degrees of freedom . . 18-32
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
Bottom-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Component objects . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Component part files . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Component Preview window . . . . 18-7
constraints
perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . 18-22
General concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Identify components . . . . . . . . . 17-11
Load options
Reference Sets . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Saved Load Options . . . . . . . 17-8
Load Options
Part Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Load states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Make Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Make Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
master model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Move Component . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
Open an assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Select components . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Top down and bottom up
modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Display commands . . . . . . . . . . 17-12
hierarchy tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
B
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Boolean commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Inferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
C
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Change Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Combine bodies
Boolean commands . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Customer Defaults
Directory Structures . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
DPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3, F-5
Essentials for NX Designers
Index-1
Index
Setting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
view creation options . . . . . . . . 19-28
E
D
Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Delayed Update after Edit . . . . . . . 8-29
Delayed Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Design in context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Design intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
DesignLogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Parameter Entry Options
Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-35
appended text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-39
edit
change precision . . . . . . . . 19-41
inherit preferences . . . . . . . 19-42
placement cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-38
preferences and placement . . . . 19-37
text orientation and text arrow
placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-40
Distance between objects . . . . . . . . 8-25
Drawings
adding projected views
project view options . . . . . . 19-32
projection lines . . . . . . . . . . 19-31
adding views
preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-31
annotation preferences . . . . . . . 19-36
See also Annotation
create new sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
deleting a sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
edit notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-47
edit sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
edit views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-33
drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-33
editing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-33
monochrome display . . . . . . . . . 19-14
open sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
removing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-33
Index-2
Essentials for NX Designers
Edge blend
add new set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Edit
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-15
Edit Feature
Reorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Expressions
case sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
insert name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
list references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
List References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
listing expressions associated with
features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
precedence and associativity . . . . . B-3
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Inferred Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
start and end distance . . . . . . . . 7-10
F
Feature Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Feature Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
File Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4–1-5
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
G
Gateway
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Index
H
Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2–12-3
Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
I
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
L
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
M
Make Current Feature . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Master model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Measure Bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Mirror Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Modeling strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Preview selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
View manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
View shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Mouse Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Mouse shortcut menu
Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Orient View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Set Rotate Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
True Shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
O
Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
OrientXpress tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
P
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Parameter Entry Options . . . . . . . 11-11
Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Part family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-35
Part Family
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-36
Part Files
Change Displayed Part . . . . . . . . 1-17
Close Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
color coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Dependencies panel . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Details panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Main panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Preview panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Timestamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Pattern Feature
methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5
Positioning
Edit
Add Dimension . . . . . . . . . . E-16
Delete Dimension . . . . . . . . . E-17
Edit Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
Positioning Methods
Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Line onto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Parallel at a Distance . . . . . . . . . E-12
Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Point onto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Point onto Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-9
Preview selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Procedure
Creating a Group Role . . . . . . . . . G-8
Creating a User Role . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Edit a User Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Q
QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Essentials for NX Designers
Index-3
Index
R
Referencing Existing
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Reorder features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
start and end angles . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, G-2
Choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
creating group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
creating user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
editing user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-13
User-Defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
S
Save Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Save Work Part Only . . . . . . . . . . 17-16
Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Selection
QuickPick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Selection bar
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Point
Snap Point options . . . . . . . . 2-36
Selection Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Curve rule options . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
face options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Follow Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
selecting sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Stop at Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
assign alternate thicknesses . . . . 13-4
creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Show Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Sketch
Auto Constrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Constraints
Inferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Create Inferred Constraints . . . . . 9-5
Creation method
On Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Curve functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Index-4
Essentials for NX Designers
Degrees of freedom . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Delay Evaluation
Evaluate process . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Dimensional Constraints
Create inferred . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Constraint assistance . . . . . . . 9-3
General process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Inferred Constraints
Snap Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Internal and external . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Status change . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Lines at angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Lines parallel or perpendicular . . 4-36
Lines tangent to a curve . . . . . . . 4-36
Naming
Modeling application . . . . . . 4-18
Sketch Task Environment . . 4-19
Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36, 4-37
Profile
Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Quick Extend
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Quick Extend procedure . . . . 4-43
Quick Trim
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Quick Trim procedure . . . . . 4-41
Reattach
Sketch in place . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Reference direction . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Right hand rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Timestamp and dependencies . . . 8-17
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Sweep Along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Swept Features
Body types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
T
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4–1-5
mt10051_s – NX 8.5 – © 2012 Siemens PLM Software
Index
Toolbars
Customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Add or remove buttons . . . . . . 2-4
Displaying toolbars . . . . . . . . 2-2
Saving configuration . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Trim Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
OrientXpress tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
View Preferences
Smooth Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
View shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
View triad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Views
manipulation
View triad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
U
Update Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
W
V
vector
WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
WCS Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Essentials for NX Designers
Index-5
Reference tear-out pages
These reference tear-out pages are provided for your convenience. The
following pages are included:
•
An overview of Siemens Learning Advantage
•
A Student Profile sheet that your instructor may have you complete at
the beginning of the course
•
The course agenda
•
Evaluation sheets for the course delivery and the course materials. You
may also be given information about filling these out online.
This page left blank intentionally.
Siemens Learning Advantage
Maximize your PLM investment with e-Learning!
Siemens Learning Advantage is a convenient,
easy to use e-Learning portal that provides costand time-effective methods for users to gain
skills and knowledge of Siemens PLM Software
solutions. It contains an unparalleled library
of self-paced courses and assessments, as well
as management tools for companies to measure
learning progress and to administer learning
programs.
Competitive advantage
Siemens Learning Advantage courses present consistent methods and concepts approved
by Siemens. Our course development teams work closely with Product Development to
ensure that prescribed processes reflect the intended product usage and industry best
practices. No other training provider can make this claim! And because our learning
products are coordinated with Siemens product releases, you can be confident that
training will be delivered in time for your upgrade.
Benefits include:
•
•
•
•
•
Simple user interface requiring only a standard internet browser.
On-demand internet access to self-paced courses and assessments.
Extensive self-paced library supporting a broad range of Siemens products and
versions.
Online learning management system for tracking and reporting training progress.
Memberships renew on an annual basis and provide uninterrupted access to courses.
Learn more about Siemens Learning Advantage by visiting our web site or contact your
Siemens PLM Software sales representative for purchase information.
This page left blank intentionally.
PLM Software
www.siemens.com/plm
Student Profile
To stay in touch with our customers, we are asking for some background information. We will keep this information confidential and
will not share this with anyone outside Education Services. Please print your information.
Your name _____________________________________________________________________________________ U.S. citizen?
Yes
No
Course title: Essentials for NX Designers Dates: _____________ thru _____________
Hotel/motel while training: __________________________________________________ Planned departure time after class: ________________
Employer _____________________________________________________________ Location ______________________________________________
Supervisor/manager: _______________________________________________ Emergency contact phone: _________________________________
Your job title and responsibilities ______________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Industry:
Automotive
Aerospace
Consumer products
Machining
Tooling
Medical
Other
Types of products/parts/data that you work with: ________________________________________________________________________________
Platform (operating system): ______________________________________________
Reason for training: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________
List any training you have had for Siemens PLM Software products, such as NX, I-deas, Imageware, Teamcenter Manufacturing,
Teamcenter Engineering, Teamcenter Enterprise, Tecnomatix, or Dimensional Management/Visualization.
Software
Training provided by:
When
Course name
Instructor-led
or self-paced?
Other CAD/CAM/CAE/PLM software you have used: ____________________________________________________________________________
Please indicate your experience with the following:
Thank you for your participation. We hope our training meets your expectations.
This page left blank intentionally.
Course agenda — Essentials for NX Designers
Day 1
Morning
•
•
•
Introduction & course overview
Lesson 1 – NX part files
Lesson 2 – The NX user interface
Afternoon
•
•
•
Day 2
Lesson 3 – Coordinate systems
Lesson 4 – Sketching
Projects – Simple Sketching
Morning
•
•
•
Lesson 5 – Expressions
Lesson 6 – Datum features
Lesson 7 – Swept features
Afternoon
•
•
•
Day 3
Projects – Simple Sweeps
Lesson 8 – Part structure
Lesson 9 – Using sketches
Morning
•
•
•
•
•
Lesson 10 – Trim Body
Projects – Sketching/Trimming
Lesson 11 – Swept feature options
Projects – Advanced Sweeps
Lesson 12 – Hole features
Afternoon
•
•
•
Day 4
Projects – Hole features
Lesson 13 – Shell
Lesson 14 – Associative copies
Morning
•
•
•
Lesson 15 – Edge operations
Projects – Shell, Associative Copies, Blends and Chamfers
Lesson 16 – Introduction to Assemblies
Afternoon
•
•
Day 5
Lesson 17 – Adding and constraining components
Projects – Adding and constraining components
Morning
•
•
Lesson 18 – Introduction to Drafting
Projects – Drafting
Afternoon
•
Lesson 19 – Introduction to Synchronous Modeling
This page left blank intentionally.
Siemens PLM Software – Delivery Evaluation
Your name: ____________________________________________________________
Course title: Essentials for NX Designers
Course #: mt10051
Dates: _____________________________
Instructor: _____________________________________________________________
Siemens PLM Software – Courseware Evaluation
Your name: ____________________________________________________________
Course title: Essentials for NX Designers
Course #: mt10051
Dates: _____________________________
Name (optional): _____________________________________ Location/room ________________
If you would prefer to fill out an evaluation online, please go to the following URL:
http://training.industrysoftware.automation.siemens.com/eval/
Session ID: ______________________ (provided by instructor). Must be completed within two weeks.
Thank you for your business. We hope you will consider us for your future training and
professional development.